US20060023781A1 - Digital PWM controller with efficiency optimization - Google Patents
Digital PWM controller with efficiency optimization Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20060023781A1 US20060023781A1 US11/172,351 US17235105A US2006023781A1 US 20060023781 A1 US20060023781 A1 US 20060023781A1 US 17235105 A US17235105 A US 17235105A US 2006023781 A1 US2006023781 A1 US 2006023781A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- edge
- input
- output
- switches
- node
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 title claims description 10
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 35
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 10
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 claims description 27
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 claims description 4
- 230000008014 freezing Effects 0.000 claims 5
- 238000007710 freezing Methods 0.000 claims 5
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 abstract description 10
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 72
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 70
- 239000003990 capacitor Substances 0.000 description 55
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 26
- 230000000630 rising effect Effects 0.000 description 22
- 230000001052 transient effect Effects 0.000 description 21
- 230000004224 protection Effects 0.000 description 20
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 11
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 11
- 238000005070 sampling Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000033228 biological regulation Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000003321 amplification Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000003111 delayed effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000000804 electron spin resonance spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000003199 nucleic acid amplification method Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000035508 accumulation Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000009825 accumulation Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000004804 winding Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000003985 ceramic capacitor Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 4
- 101100156949 Arabidopsis thaliana XRN4 gene Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 101100215777 Schizosaccharomyces pombe (strain 972 / ATCC 24843) ain1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 238000012805 post-processing Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000001934 delay Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004069 differentiation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001939 inductive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000003071 parasitic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000010363 phase shift Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012549 training Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 241000238876 Acari Species 0.000 description 1
- 230000005355 Hall effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 101000763966 Homo sapiens TLC domain-containing protein 1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100026917 TLC domain-containing protein 1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003466 anti-cipated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002596 correlated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007613 environmental effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011156 evaluation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010606 normalization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012358 sourcing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H02—GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
- H02M—APPARATUS FOR CONVERSION BETWEEN AC AND AC, BETWEEN AC AND DC, OR BETWEEN DC AND DC, AND FOR USE WITH MAINS OR SIMILAR POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS; CONVERSION OF DC OR AC INPUT POWER INTO SURGE OUTPUT POWER; CONTROL OR REGULATION THEREOF
- H02M3/00—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output
- H02M3/22—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output with intermediate conversion into AC
- H02M3/24—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output with intermediate conversion into AC by static converters
- H02M3/28—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output with intermediate conversion into AC by static converters using discharge tubes with control electrode or semiconductor devices with control electrode to produce the intermediate AC
- H02M3/325—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output with intermediate conversion into AC by static converters using discharge tubes with control electrode or semiconductor devices with control electrode to produce the intermediate AC using devices of a triode or a transistor type requiring continuous application of a control signal
- H02M3/335—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output with intermediate conversion into AC by static converters using discharge tubes with control electrode or semiconductor devices with control electrode to produce the intermediate AC using devices of a triode or a transistor type requiring continuous application of a control signal using semiconductor devices only
- H02M3/33507—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output with intermediate conversion into AC by static converters using discharge tubes with control electrode or semiconductor devices with control electrode to produce the intermediate AC using devices of a triode or a transistor type requiring continuous application of a control signal using semiconductor devices only with automatic control of the output voltage or current, e.g. flyback converters
- H02M3/33515—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output with intermediate conversion into AC by static converters using discharge tubes with control electrode or semiconductor devices with control electrode to produce the intermediate AC using devices of a triode or a transistor type requiring continuous application of a control signal using semiconductor devices only with automatic control of the output voltage or current, e.g. flyback converters with digital control
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H02—GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
- H02M—APPARATUS FOR CONVERSION BETWEEN AC AND AC, BETWEEN AC AND DC, OR BETWEEN DC AND DC, AND FOR USE WITH MAINS OR SIMILAR POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS; CONVERSION OF DC OR AC INPUT POWER INTO SURGE OUTPUT POWER; CONTROL OR REGULATION THEREOF
- H02M3/00—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output
- H02M3/02—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output without intermediate conversion into AC
- H02M3/04—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output without intermediate conversion into AC by static converters
- H02M3/10—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output without intermediate conversion into AC by static converters using discharge tubes with control electrode or semiconductor devices with control electrode
- H02M3/145—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output without intermediate conversion into AC by static converters using discharge tubes with control electrode or semiconductor devices with control electrode using devices of a triode or transistor type requiring continuous application of a control signal
- H02M3/155—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output without intermediate conversion into AC by static converters using discharge tubes with control electrode or semiconductor devices with control electrode using devices of a triode or transistor type requiring continuous application of a control signal using semiconductor devices only
- H02M3/156—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output without intermediate conversion into AC by static converters using discharge tubes with control electrode or semiconductor devices with control electrode using devices of a triode or transistor type requiring continuous application of a control signal using semiconductor devices only with automatic control of output voltage or current, e.g. switching regulators
- H02M3/157—Conversion of DC power input into DC power output without intermediate conversion into AC by static converters using discharge tubes with control electrode or semiconductor devices with control electrode using devices of a triode or transistor type requiring continuous application of a control signal using semiconductor devices only with automatic control of output voltage or current, e.g. switching regulators with digital control
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H02—GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
- H02M—APPARATUS FOR CONVERSION BETWEEN AC AND AC, BETWEEN AC AND DC, OR BETWEEN DC AND DC, AND FOR USE WITH MAINS OR SIMILAR POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS; CONVERSION OF DC OR AC INPUT POWER INTO SURGE OUTPUT POWER; CONTROL OR REGULATION THEREOF
- H02M1/00—Details of apparatus for conversion
- H02M1/0003—Details of control, feedback or regulation circuits
- H02M1/0012—Control circuits using digital or numerical techniques
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H02—GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
- H02M—APPARATUS FOR CONVERSION BETWEEN AC AND AC, BETWEEN AC AND DC, OR BETWEEN DC AND DC, AND FOR USE WITH MAINS OR SIMILAR POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS; CONVERSION OF DC OR AC INPUT POWER INTO SURGE OUTPUT POWER; CONTROL OR REGULATION THEREOF
- H02M1/00—Details of apparatus for conversion
- H02M1/0067—Converter structures employing plural converter units, other than for parallel operation of the units on a single load
- H02M1/007—Plural converter units in cascade
Definitions
- the present invention pertains in general to DC-DC power converters and, more particularly, to a digital controller for a DC-DC power converter having a programmable dead time.
- DC-DC power converters are utilized in situations where one DC voltage is converted to another DC voltage.
- the processor requires a fairly low voltage and a fairly high current. Rather than convert an incoming AC voltage down to a very low DC voltage and then route the low DC voltage across a PC board, a higher DC voltage is output by the power supply, routed around to the various components on the PC board and then, proximate to the processor, the voltage is down converted to a very low level on the order of 1.0 V. This requires a conversion device to be disposed proximate to one or more high current integrated circuits on the board.
- Typical DC-DC converters are fabricated using a switching supply that utilizes a switched inductor or capacitor configuration with the input DC voltage switched to the input thereof with a periodically waveform operating at a preset switching frequency with a varying duty cycle. By sensing the output voltage and comparing it with a desired voltage, the duty cycle of the waveform can be adjusted to control the amount of current supplied to the reactive components. This control is facilitated with a negative feedback control loop.
- the analog feedback loop is well understood and provides some advantages over the other type of feedback loop, the digital feedback loop.
- Each of the feedback loops has associated therewith a voltage sense input for sensing the supply output voltage and a pulse width modulator (PWM) for generating switching pulses for driving switches.
- PWM pulse width modulator
- the sensed voltage is compared in the analog domain to a desired operating DC voltage to generate an error voltage that is reduced to essentially zero volts at regulation.
- a compensator This provides some phase lead in the feedback loop for the purpose of loop stability.
- the digital controller portion of the digital feedback loop is similar to the analog feedback loop.
- the voltage signal sense input utilizes an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) to convert the output voltage to a digital value and then compare this to a desired voltage to determine the difference voltage as an error voltage.
- a digital compensator then provides some phase lead to the feedback to maintain stability in the control loop.
- This digital error voltage is then converted into a varying pulse width for output to the driving switches on the switching converter. This in effect is a digital-to-analog converter.
- Typical switching converters such as buck converters can utilize single or multiple phases to facilitate the switching operation.
- Analog controllers do not have the ability to independently control the dead time for control signals for complementary switchers.
- the rising edge of a second control signal is based upon a falling edge of a first control signal.
- the second control signal is completely dependent on the falling edge of the first control signal.
- Some manner for independently controlling a rising edge of a second control signal with respect to a falling edge of the first control signal would provide much greater control of the operation of the switched power supply.
- the dead time determination has a direct bearing on the efficiency of operation of the power supply. From that standpoint, it is important to ensure that complimentary switches operate with a minimum of dead time so as to reduce input current.
- the present invention disclosed and claimed herein in one aspect thereof, comprises a method for optimizing the efficiency of a digital switched power supply having a plurality of switches responsive to generated pulse control signals.
- the process involves varying the initiation of conduction in at least one of the switches relative to the conduction in another of the switches by controlling when an edge in an associated one of the pulse control signals is generated.
- the current to the power supply is measured during the step of varying and a minima in the measured current determined over the step of varying. After the step of determining, the configuration of the respective pulse control signals at the minima is frozen.
- FIG. 1 illustrates an overall block diagram of a switching power supply
- FIG. 2 illustrates a schematic diagram of the switching portion of a half-bridge power supply
- FIG. 3 illustrates the timing diagram for the control pulses to the switching power supply
- FIG. 4 illustrates a diagrammatic view of the digital controller utilized in conjunction with a buck converter
- FIG. 5 illustrates a more detailed view of the digital controller
- FIGS. 6 a - 6 b illustrates a block diagram of the microcontroller portion of the digital controller
- FIG. 6 c illustrates a diagrammatic view of a monolithic solution utilizing the embodiments of FIGS. 4, 5 and 6 ;
- FIG. 7 illustrates an overall block diagram of the Flash ADC
- FIG. 8 illustrates a prior art Flash ADC
- FIG. 9 illustrates a more detailed diagram of the comparator portion of the Flash ADC of the present disclosure.
- FIGS. 10 and 10 a illustrate a block diagram of a comparator string
- FIG. 11 illustrates a timing diagram for the operation of the compare operation
- FIG. 12 illustrates a schematic diagram of the bias circuitry for the resistor ladder
- FIG. 13 illustrates a schematic diagram for the first comparator section
- FIG. 14 illustrates a schematic diagram for the second comparator section
- FIG. 15 illustrates a schematic diagram for the reconfigurable latch
- FIG. 16 illustrates a gain response curve for the reconfigurable latch
- FIG. 18 illustrates a simplified block diagram of the PID
- FIG. 19 illustrates a more detailed block diagram of the PID
- FIGS. 20 a and 20 b illustrate a z-domain plot of amplitude and phase
- FIG. 21 illustrates a frequency plot of a low pass filter
- FIG. 22 illustrates a frequency response of the sinc filter
- FIG. 23 illustrates a block diagram of one implementation of the PID
- FIG. 24 illustrates a Bode plot of the overall digital compensator comprised of the PID and LPF
- FIG. 25 illustrates a more detailed waveform of the sinc filter
- FIG. 26 illustrates a plot of the voltage response in a prior art system to positive and negative transients
- FIGS. 27 a and 27 b illustrate voltage plots for transients in the presence of voltage positioning for both low and high current, respectively;
- FIGS. 28 a and 28 b illustrate the relationship between the voltage set point and the current level
- FIG. 29 illustrates a flow chart depicting the operation of voltage positioning
- FIG. 30 illustrates a block diagram of the voltage positioning in the current sensing operation utilizing two current sensors
- FIG. 32 illustrates a schematic diagram of the method for determining the capacitor current
- FIG. 33 illustrates a diagrammatic view of the method for measuring the total load current without Hall sensors
- FIG. 34 illustrates a diagrammatic view of the DPWM
- FIG. 35 illustrates a more detailed diagrammatic view of the DPWM
- FIG. 36 illustrates a block diagram of the trim and limit sub-system
- FIG. 37 illustrates a block diagram of the DPWM timing register program model
- FIG. 38 illustrates a block diagram of the shut-down sources
- FIG. 39 illustrates a timing diagram for the sync operation
- FIG. 40 illustrates a timing diagram for the frame skipping operation
- FIG. 41 illustrates a simplified block diagram of the bypass logic
- FIG. 42 illustrates a flow chart for the operation of the pattern generator for creation of the edges of the various phases
- FIG. 43 illustrates a flow chart for the operation of the u(n) selection
- FIG. 44 a is a functional block diagram of over current protection circuitry
- FIG. 44 b illustrates an integrator hold circuit responsive to the primary interrupt
- FIG. 45 is a timing diagram illustrating the operation of a phase output of the digital pulse width modulator responsive to an over current detection signal
- FIG. 46 is a timing diagram illustrating the use of a blanking pulse
- FIG. 47 is a flow diagram illustrating the generation of primary and secondary interrupts by the over current protection circuitry
- FIG. 49 is a functional block diagram illustrating the circuitry for providing over voltage and over temperature protections for a digital pulse with modulator
- FIG. 50 is a flow diagram illustrating the method for providing over voltage and over temperature protections
- FIG. 51 illustrates a diagrammatic view of the PLL
- FIGS. 52 a - d are timing diagrams illustrating a programmable dead time for complementary switches
- FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram of a multi-phase switched power circuit
- FIG. 54 is a timing diagram for the phase inputs to each of the switching transistors of the circuit in FIG. 53 ;
- FIG. 55 is a flow diagram illustrating the method for establishing a dead time between to phase outputs
- FIG. 56 illustrates a more detailed block diagram of one pattern generator for a single phase illustrating the operation of the associated finite state machine for a given edge of a particular phase output, either the leading or the trailing edge;
- FIGS. 57 a - 57 d illustrate timing diagrams for the various methodologies for generating an edge
- FIGS. 58 a and 58 b illustrate the generation of a relative edge associated with dead time between two edges
- FIG. 59 illustrates a flow chart depicting the operation of the generating a relative edge
- FIG. 60 illustrates a flow chart depicting the operation of generating an absolute edge
- FIG. 61 illustrates a flow chart depicting the operation of generating the u(n) edge
- FIG. 62 illustrates a diagrammatic view of a multi-phase system for determining dead time
- FIG. 63 shows a plot of dead time versus input current
- FIG. 64 illustrates a flow chart for optimizing the dead time value.
- FIG. 1 there is illustrated a top level schematic diagram for the switching power supply of the present embodiment, which in this FIG. is illustrated as a half bridge power supply.
- the main portion of the power supply comprises a primary switch group 102 that is operable to receive an input voltage on a node 104 , this being a DC voltage, and ground on a node 106 .
- the primary switch group 102 is coupled through an isolation transformer 108 to a secondary switch group 110 .
- the secondary switch group 110 is operable to drive an output voltage node 112 that is connected to one terminal of a load 114 , the secondary switch group 110 also having a ground connection on a node 116 , the load 114 disposed between the node 112 and the node 116 .
- the two switch groups 102 and 110 are operable to operate in conjunction with various pulse inputs on a control bus 118 associated with the primary switch group 102 and with various pulse inputs on a control bus 126 associated with the secondary switch group 110 .
- a digital control circuit 124 is provided which is operable to control the operation of the primary switch group 102 and the secondary switch group 110 .
- the nodes 104 and 106 are provided as inputs to the digital control circuit 124 for sensing the voltage and current on the primary, the digital control circuit 124 generating the information on the bus 118 for control of the primary switch group 102 .
- the control circuit 124 must be isolated from the secondary switch group 110 . This is facilitated by driving a bus 126 through an isolation circuit 128 , such as an opto-isolator, to drive the bus 120 .
- the control circuit 124 is operable to sense the voltage and current levels on the output node 112 through sense lines 130 which are also connected through an isolation circuit 132 to the digital control circuit 124 .
- the digital control circuit 124 is also interfaced to a bus 136 to receive external control/configuration information. This can be facilitated with a serial data bus such as an SMB serial data bus.
- FIG. 2 there is illustrated a detailed schematic diagram of the primary switch group 102 , isolation transformer 108 and secondary switch group 110 .
- the node 104 is connected to one side of the source-drain path of a power switching transistor 202 , the other side thereof connected to a node 204 .
- Node 204 is connected to one side of the primary of isolation transformer 108 , a primary 206 .
- the other side of primary 206 is connected to a node 208 .
- Node 208 is coupled to node 104 through a capacitor 210 .
- Node 106 is coupled to one side of the source-drain path of a switching transistor 212 , the other side thereof connected to node 204 .
- Node 208 is coupled through a capacitor 214 to node 106 .
- a diode 218 has the anode thereof connected to node 208 and the cathode thereof connected to a node 220 , node 220 connected to one side of the source-drain path of a switching transistor 222 , the other side thereof connected to node 204 .
- Switching transistor 212 is controlled by a switching pulse P 1 , the gate of switching transistor 202 controlled by a switching pulse P 2 and the gate of switching transistor 222 controlled by switching pulse P 3 .
- Switching pulses P 1 , P 2 and P 3 all form part of the bus 118 .
- the secondary switch group 110 is comprised of a switching transistor 230 having the source-drain path thereof connected between the node 116 and a node 232 , the gate thereof controlled by a switching pulse P 5 .
- Node 232 is connected to one side of a winding 234 which forms part of the secondary of the isolation transformer 108 .
- the other side of winding 234 is connected to a center tap node 236 , node 236 connected to one side of a winding 238 , the other side thereof connected to a node 240 .
- Winding 238 and winding 234 form the secondary of transformer 108 .
- Node 240 is connected to one side of the source-drain path of a switching transistor 242 , the other side thereof connected to node 116 and the gate thereof connected to a switching pulse P 4 .
- An inductor 244 is connected between node 236 and the output node 112 .
- the output node 112 is coupled to the ground node 116 through a capacitor 246 which is connected proximate to the other side of the source-drain path of transistor 230 and coupled through a capacitor 248 to node 116 proximate to the other side of the source-drain path of switching transistor 242 .
- the switching pulse P 1 is a pulse-width modulated switching pulse having a rising edge 320 .
- the rising edge 320 changes the level to a high level 322 which then returns to the low level at a falling edge 324 .
- the switching pulse P 2 is delayed from the falling edge 324 by a delay t d1 .
- the rising edge 326 changes the level of switching pulse P 2 to a high level 328 followed by a change back to a low level having a falling edge 330 .
- the switching pulse P 3 goes from a low level to a high level ahead of the falling edge of P 2 by delay time t d2 .
- the switching pulse P 3 returns to the low level at a falling edge 336 .
- the switching pulse P 4 goes from a low level to a high level 336 at a rising edge 338 .
- the rising edge 338 is delayed from the rising edge 320 by a delay time t d3 .
- the switching pulse P 4 returns to a low level ahead of the falling edge of P 1 by delay time t d3 .
- the switching pulse P 5 goes from a low level to a high level 342 at a rising edge 344 which is delayed from edge 326 of switching pulse P 2 by a delay t d3 .
- Switching pulse P 5 returns to a low level ahead of the rising edge of P 3 by delay t d3 .
- the delay t d1 is the duration of time required for transistor 212 to go from a conducting state to a non-conducting state and prior to transistor 202 going to a conducting state.
- the delay t d1 is a delay that is required in order to ensure that the switches are completely off such that connecting the node 204 to the ground node 106 does not cause current to flow through transistor 202 . This could result in a “shoot-through” current spike. Depending upon the circuit components and operating frequency, it may be necessary to vary this delay.
- transistor 222 will be turned on prior to turning off switch 202 with the delay t d2 allowing the diode 218 to be placed in parallel with the primary 206 prior to turning off transistor 202 .
- transistor 242 is maintained in a non-conducting state until transistor 212 is fully turned on and node 204 is sufficiently grounded.
- the falling edge 346 be delayed until the transistor 222 has fully turned on, which requires the delay t d3 .
- This timing is conventional and, depending upon the application, the various delays will be adjusted, these adjustments due to the size of the load, circuit characteristics and operating frequency.
- FIG. 4 there is illustrated a block diagram of the digital controller 124 of FIG. 1 .
- the switching converter is generally realized with a half bridge converter, but a simpler buck converter 402 is illustrated in this figure.
- This requires a plurality of phases 404 for controlling the switches internal to the buck converter 402 .
- This will allow a DC input voltage to be converted to a DC output voltage on output 406 .
- the digital controller senses the output voltage on the output 406 as a sense voltage, V SENSE , and inputs this to one input of a differential analog-to-digital converter (ADC) 408 .
- the other input of the ADC 408 is connected to an analog or reference voltage generated by a V REF generator 410 that, as will be described hereinbelow, comprises a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
- V REF generator 410 that, as will be described hereinbelow, comprises a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
- DAC digital-to-analog
- the output of the ADC 408 is a digital output that represents the difference between the analog output voltage on the DC output 406 and the “set point” generated by V REF generator 410 .
- the output of the V REF generator 410 is typically the desired output voltage.
- the operation of the control loop at regulation will typically result in a “0” output from the ADC 408 .
- this is the “0” code for the ADC 408 .
- This is input to a digital compensator 412 , which is operable to provide some phase lead in the loop.
- the buck converter 402 is comprised of a combination of a series inductor and shunt capacitor that forms an LC network, which provides a phase lag of 180°.
- the control loop will typically be provided by a negative feedback loop and will result in an additional negative phase shift of 180°. If the loop were allowed to operate in this manner, this would result in a 0° total phase change which would be an unstable loop. As such, the digital compensator 412 provides some phase lead to stabilize the loop.
- the output of digital compensator 412 provides the digital control value u(n) on a digital output bus 414 for input to a digital pulse width modulator (DPWM) 416 .
- DPWM digital pulse width modulator
- the ADC 408 , digital compensator 412 and DPWM 416 are realized in hardware such that they provide relatively fast digital response and, once operating, operate in a fixed manner. However, each of the ADC 408 , digital compensator 412 , DPWM 416 and V REF generator 410 are operable to be configured and have the operation thereof monitored.
- the V REF generator 410 has a configuration block 420 associated therewith for configuring the operation thereof such that the voltage of the V REF generator 410 can be controlled. Additionally, a monitoring circuit 422 is provided for monitoring the operation thereof.
- the ADC 408 has a configuration block 424 for configuring the operation thereof and a monitoring block 426 for monitoring the operation thereof.
- the digital compensator 412 has a configuration block 428 for configuring the operation thereof and a monitoring block 430 for monitoring the operation thereof.
- the DPWM 416 has a configuration block 432 for configuring the operation thereof and a monitoring block 436 for monitoring the operation thereof.
- the ADC 408 is a parallel data converter that is configured with a Flash ADC topology.
- the digital compensator 412 is configured with a proportional-integral-derivative (PID) compensator with post processing filtering and DPWM 416 is realized with a state machine.
- PID compensator is a discrete compensation network that is operable to apply a discrete time PID control law to the signal. The operation of each of these blocks is controlled through the associated configuration and monitoring blocks with a microcontroller 440 .
- the microcontroller 440 is an instruction based engine that operates on instructions that can be downloaded to Flash memory 442 , which is non-volatile memory.
- a serial data input 442 allows instructions to be input to the microcontroller 440 for storage in the memory 442 and for various debug and control operations. Additionally, error handling is provided by a block 446 that basically provides for over current protection and over voltage protection to prevent damage to the buck converter 402 under certain conditions, as will be described in more detail hereinbelow.
- the functionality of the digital controller is embedded primarily within the circuitry of the primary block involving the ADC block 408 , the digital compensator block 412 and the DPWM block 416 .
- the microcontroller 440 basically is the “housekeeper” for the digital controller which is operable to monitor the operation thereof. When the digital controller is operating at voltage regulation and once configured, very few actions need to be taken by the microcontroller 440 . However, when the digital controller is originally configured, depending upon the environment, the type of switching converter utilized, etc., the digital controller will be configured by the microcontroller 440 for a specific application.
- the DSP solution typically utilizes a general purpose DSP and the value or functionality of the digital controller is facilitated through programing, which can be complex and typically is utilized only for very high-end digital controllers. Further, the implementation of the primary digital control in hardware provides for a more efficient design that utilizes the circuitry and is more power efficient, which is important in low power DC-DC converters, without sacrificing the benefits of digital control.
- the ADC 408 is a differential Flash ADC that is operable to determine as a digital value the difference between the voltage on the DC output node 406 , that being the V SENSE voltage, and a reference voltage on a node 502 .
- This analog reference voltage on node 502 is generated by the V REF generator 410 .
- This is comprised of an analog reference voltage generator 504 which is operable to generate a fixed analog reference voltage based on an internal reference such as a bandgap generator.
- the bandgap generator is a conventional circuit that is utilized to generate temperature and process stable voltages. This is not shown in the illustration of FIG. 5 .
- the V REF generator 504 will generate this reference voltage and provide it as a reference input to a conventional reference digital-to-analog converter 506 (reference DAC).
- reference DAC digital-to-analog converter
- This is a scaling DAC that is operable to receive a digital word on a bus 508 from a reference DAC control block 510 that is controlled by the microcontroller 440 .
- This is basically a register that can be written to for the purpose of generating the reference DAC voltage.
- the reference DAC 506 is operable to convert this digital value on bus 508 to an analog voltage on node 502 for input to one of the differential inputs of the ADC 408 .
- the voltage generated by V REF generator 504 is a 1.25 V analog voltage.
- the output of the reference DAC 506 comprises the desired voltage of the DC-DC converter. In one embodiment, this is approximately 1.0 V, a conventional processor voltage.
- the reference voltage on node 502 is compared with the V SENSE voltage on node 406 and, when regulated, this should essentially be zero.
- a switch 512 which is operable to short the two inputs together. This will be described hereinbelow.
- the ADC 408 is a parallel ADC of the Flash type. It is a window ADC that is operable to generate a zero voltage output when the differential input is “0.”
- An ADC control block 514 is operable to provide a control input to the ADC 408 .
- the control block 514 provides a variable LSB input to the ADC 408 for use with some of various features thereof.
- the ADC operates on an ADC CK clock signal and also generates an end of conversion cycle interrupt, EOC 1 IRQ. This provides an indication of when a data conversion operation is complete on a given sample and digital data associated with the analog sample is ready to be output.
- the data is output through an inverter circuit 516 for input to one input of a 4-input digital multiplexer 518 , which is part of the input interface to the digital compensator 412 .
- the digital compensator 412 in addition to receiving the output of the ADC 408 through the inverter 516 , is also operable to receive a ground input on a digital input bus 520 , ADC data from a register 522 through a bus 524 for digitally generated ADC data, primarily for test purposes, and also a “raw” data input on a bus 526 .
- the sensed voltage, V SENSE is determined by another ADC, which is described hereinbelow, which is a SAR ADC. This is a slower ADC and the output thereof is stored in a special function register, V SENSE/SFR , the output of which is provided on a bus 528 .
- the difference between the digital representation of the V SENSE voltage and the actual input to reference DAC 506 on the bus 508 is determined by a digital subtraction block 530 , the output of which comprises the bus 526 . Therefore, a single-ended SAR can be utilized to bypass the ADC 408 and determine a value for input to the digital compensator 412 during start-up and the such, this providing the differential operation in the digital domain.
- the ADC 408 is the preferred input data converter.
- the output of the multiplexer 518 is input to a PID controller block, which provides a proportional, integral, derivative (PID) control algorithm.
- PID proportional, integral, derivative
- One difficulty associated with designing a controller arises from the LC resonance of a buck converter.
- An open-loop frequency-response analysis exhibits a resonant peak at the cutoff frequency of the LC filter.
- a sharp peak, quantified by the quality factor (Q) is desirable for efficient power conversion for lossless power conversion.
- Q quality factor
- this resonant peak must be kept below unity gain in the open-loop frequency response to ensure stability.
- Such a controller configuration has a low loop bandwidth and leads to slow transit response characteristic.
- This PID block 540 provides the requisite loop stability without sacrificing bandwidth and improves the loop's transient response.
- the proportional and derivative control blocks introduce compensation zeros that push unity-gain beyond the resonant peak and eliminates the bandwidth limitation otherwise imposed by the resonant nature of the buck converter.
- a PID control block 542 that controls the operation of the PID 540 by providing, as will be set forth hereinbelow, gain constants for the operation thereof.
- the operation is clocked with a filter clock, FILTCLK, on a clock input 544 .
- the input to the PID 540 is determined by the output of multiplexer 518 , which is controlled by a PID input control block 546 .
- the clock rate is around 10 MHz, wherein the switching frequency of the power supply is around 500 kHz
- the analog corollary to the digital controller has one inherent benefit in that the overall operation of the analog controller has an inherent low pass filter function associated therewith.
- the PID 540 has an amplitude and phase response that increases with increasing frequency such that the gain thereof becomes relatively high at higher frequencies and the phase also increases in an ever increasing phase leading manner.
- post processing filtering is required. This is facilitated in the present embodiment with either a low pass filter, represented by an LPF filter block 550 or a sinc filter block 552 .
- the output of the PID 540 is input to both of these blocks 550 and 552 and the outputs thereof selected with a two-input digital multiplexer 554 .
- the sinc filter operation 552 provides for a plurality of “notches” which are controlled by a sinc control block 556 , the sinc filter block 552 clocked by the FILTCLK clock signal.
- the LPF filter block 550 also utilizes variable poles and zeros that are set by an LPF control block 558 .
- the LPF filter block 550 is also clocked by the filter clock, FILTCLK.
- the output of multiplexer 554 provides the output from the digital compensator 412 , the output selected by the multiplexer 554 controlled by a filter select block 560 .
- the output of the multiplexer 554 from the digital compensator 412 is provided on a digital data bus 562 . This is input to a PID data register 564 for the purpose of monitoring the operation thereof, such that the output of the digital compensator block 412 can be monitored.
- the output of the multiplexer 554 is also input to the input of a two-input digital multiplexer 566 , the other input thereof receiving data from the PID data block 564 , such that the operation of the compensator 412 can be bypassed.
- the multiplexer 566 is controlled by a DPWM input control block 568 .
- the output of the multiplexer 566 provides the u(n) error signal, which is output on a bus 570 to the DPWM 416 .
- the DPWM 416 is a state machine and is controlled by a DPWM control block 572 .
- the DPWM block is operable to receive various control signals from the DPWM control block 572 from the microcontroller 442 and is also operable to generate a plurality of interrupts (not shown) and receive various interrupts. For example, at the end of a given frame, there will be an EOFIRQ interrupt generated, and the DPWM 416 will also receive various interrupts from the error handling block 446 to indicate either over current situations or over voltage situations.
- This microcontroller 440 is an 8051 instruction-based engine which is substantially disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/244,344, filed on Sep. 16, 2002 and entitled “Precision Oscillator for an Asynchronous Transmission System,” which is incorporated herein in its entirety by reference for all purposes whatsoever.
- a processing core 602 which is an 8051 microprocessor engine. This is an instruction-based engine.
- a 32K byte Flash memory block 604 256 byte IRAM block 606 and a 1K byte XRAM block 608 , providing memory for the processing core 602 .
- Clock signals are provided to the core 602 in the form of a system clock, SYSCLK, on a clock line 610 . This is provided on the output of a multiplexer 612 .
- the multiplexer is operable to receive the input thereof from a 20 MHz boot oscillator block 614 , an input from an 80 kHz low frequency oscillator block 616 to provide an 80 kHz clock for use in a sleep mode, or a higher frequency clock in the form of a divided down 25 MHz oscillator 618 .
- the 25 MHz oscillator is the primary oscillator at the operating frequency of the core 602 , as the core 602 operates at high frequency or at low frequency.
- the processing of instructions occurs at a much slower rate and this mode is typically used in a sleep mode.
- the higher frequency clock oscillator is utilized.
- This clock is a non-crystal based clock and has an accuracy of approximately 2%.
- the output of the clock 618 is input through a two-input multiplexer 620 to the multiplexer 612 , the output of multiplexer 620 passed through a divide block 622 in order to divide the frequency of the clock, if necessary.
- an external clock is input to the other input of multiplexer 620 , such that either the internally generated 25 MHz clock can be utilized or an external clock can be utilized.
- the core 602 is also operable to receive a Reset signal on a block 630 , which is operable to generate a reset when it is not in a debug operating mode.
- a debug operating mode the Reset input on a node 631 is input to the clock input of a debug hardware block 634 to provide a clock signal thereto, the other input being a serial data input on a line 635 .
- This is a two-wire serial data port that allows for very low clocked data to be input to the core 602 during a debug mode.
- the reset block 630 provides the reset signal to the core 602 .
- the core 602 is interfaced through a special function register (SFR) bus 630 to various I/O blocks.
- SFR special function register
- timers 632 are provided. Each of these timers is operable to have the parameters thereof set, and initiated and each of them generates various timer interrupts, TMRXX IRQ, signals.
- TMRXX IRQ timer interrupts
- serial bus configurations for allowing for various formats of a serial data interface.
- One of these is the SM Bus/I2C format, in a block 634 . This is a conventional serial data format.
- UART functionality in a block 636 .
- PCA programmable counter/timer array
- the crossbar matrix is operable to selectively connect any of the outputs of the blocks 632 - 640 to any of a plurality of output pins associated with the port driver 642 and 644 , there being eight pins 650 associated with the port “0” driver 642 and eight pins 652 associated with the port “1” driver. These pins can function as digital outputs, digital inputs or analog inputs.
- all of the eight pins 652 associated with the port “1” driver are connectable to analog inputs of a multiple input analog multiplexer 656 which is operable to receive eight analog inputs, AIN 0 , AIN 1 , . . . , AIN 7 , a V SENSE input and a Temperature input.
- the input voltage is connected to the AIN 0 input for sensing thereof.
- a separate dedicated pin is provided for the V SENSE input for input to the multiplexer 656 .
- An additional input is provided by an internal temperature sensor 658 , which senses the chip temperature, which basically constitutes the environmental temperature, this being an input to the analog multiplexer 656 .
- SFR/LIM special function register
- LIM limiter
- an ADC window interrupt in an SFR/LIM block 668 , an SFR/LIM block for the V SENSE output 670 , an SFR/LIM block 672 for the AIN 0 output, an SFR/LIM block 674 for the AIN 1 input, and an SFR/LIM block 676 for the AIN 2 input.
- Each of these blocks 668 - 676 provide an associated interrupt, ADC 0 WINTIRQ, VSENSE IRQ, AIN 0 VIN IRQ, AIN 1 IRQ, and AIN 2 IRQ.
- each block 678 provides an associated interrupt to an OR gate 681 .
- the output of the OR gate 680 provides an interrupt, which when recognized by the core 602 , requires that the core 602 then “poll” the outputs of the SFR/LIM blocks 678 , it being recognized that each of the SFR/LIM blocks occupies a unique address in the address space of the core 602 , such that the contents thereof can be read, or in certain circumstances, written to.
- the core 602 initiates an interrupt sub-routine for servicing that particular interrupt, as is the case with any interrupt generated.
- a comparator block 680 is provided which is operable to have one compare input interface with the even ones of the pin 652 and a second input interface with the odd inputs thereto. This is a four comparator block, which is controlled by a comparator control block 682 and will generate a comparator interrupt whenever any of the respective inputs exceeds the threshold set therein.
- FIG. 6 a there is illustrated a diagrammatic view of an integrated circuit 690 , which is operable to provide all of the functions for the digital control operation in a single integrated circuit
- This integrated circuit 690 requires only connections from V SENSE on a pin 692 , switching control signals on output pins 693 , a power supply input on a power supply pin 694 and a ground connection on a pin 695 . With these minimal number of pins, the entire digital control operation can be facilitated. This assumes that a program is provided in the memory 442 .
- the program is not “hard coded,” some type of serial connection on at least one pin 696 is required, but it should be understood that other pins in the system can be multiplexed for use in programming, since programming is facilitated in an operating mode. Further, there are provided a plurality of pins 697 that are operable to receive other sense analog input voltages. However, for the straightforward operation of the digital controller, all that is required is the V SENSE input. The other inputs are required for such things as over voltage protection and over current protection and for detecting the peak current for the purposes of voltage positioning, as will be described hereinbelow.
- the digital control section is a hardware digital control section comprised of the ADC 408 , the digital compensation network 412 and the DPWM 416 . Once these blocks are parameterized, they will provide the control function associated therewith.
- the internal reference generator 410 is operable to provide the internal reference, for conversion to an analog signal by the DAC 506 . Thus, all the voltage reference information is contained in the integrated circuit 690 .
- the on chip self-contained microcontroller provides the monitoring and control functions such as over current protection, voltage positioning, etc. and, in general, provides all housekeeping functions to monitor the operation of the hardware digital control stream.
- the self-contained clock and on-board memory provide for the timing functions and the instructions for use by the microcontroller, respectively.
- the system of the present disclosure provides for a single monolithic solution that is low power due to the use of a state machine-driven digital controller without requiring the power overhead of an instruction based system, but still retains the intelligence of an instruction based system in the monitoring and reparameterizing aspect provided by the microcontroller 440 .
- a first reference voltage is generated by an on-chip bandgap generator, a voltage V BG .
- the bandgap generator is a conventional circuit that combines a very stable voltage that is stable over temperature. This voltage is input to the voltage follower circuit comprised of an amplifier 702 , the output thereof driving the gate of a p-channel transistor 704 .
- the source/drain path of the transistor 704 is connected between V DD and a node 708 .
- Node 708 is connected to the other input of amplifier 702 , such that the amplifier 702 and transistor 704 provide a source follower configuration.
- Node 714 is also connected to a variable width p-channel transistor 718 , the source/drain path thereof connected between V DD and a node 720 .
- Transistor 718 is comprised of a plurality of parallel connected binary-weighted transistors, the connection thereof being programmable, such that one or all of the parallel connected transistors can be connected in parallel on a selective basis.
- a voltage input on an input node 730 represents the negative input voltage. This is input to one input of a unity gain amplifier 732 , which has the other input thereof connected to the output on anode 734 .
- Node 734 represents the mid-point of the resistor string of resistors 722 , such that there are an equal number of resistors above as below. Thus, for the disclosed embodiment of sixty four resistors 722 , there will be thirty two resistors above and thirty two resistors below the point 734 .
- the unity gain amplifier 732 provides the drive voltage node 734 and isolates the input voltage on node 730 therefrom.
- Each of resistors 722 is connected to one of sixty four comparators on one input thereof of comparators 740 , on one input thereof. (It is noted that the number sixty four defines a “window,” but any number of comparators could be utilized to represent the entire Flash ADC window).
- the other input of each of the comparators 740 is connected to a node 742 , which is connected to the positive input voltage V IN+ . Therefore, the output of each of the respective comparators will be a “0” if the input voltage is below the resistor tap voltage and a “1” if the input voltage is above the associated tap voltage.
- the reference voltage on node 802 will typically be connected to the supply voltage and resistor 804 adjusted such that the full rail-to-rail voltage could be provided. In this example, this would only provide a resolution of 1 ⁇ 4 of the supply voltage.
- a very large number of comparators 806 will be provided associated with a large number of resistors. For a 16-bit Flash ADC, this would require 2 16 comparators and a corresponding number of resistors. This results in a significant power consumption for each of the comparators.
- the zero-code will not change but, if the voltage V REF is changed, the size of the LSB will change and the zero code will also change, since the zero-code is now “coupled” to the value of V REF . Therefore, if the LSB is required to be changed, then the tap associated with the resistor string that defines the zero-code may change. This will be described in more detail herein below.
- a distributed capacitance Associated with each of the inputs of the comparator 806 , is a distributed capacitance, which distributed capacitance would sum up to a total capacitance of C T , represented by capacitor 814 . It can be seen that the amplifier 810 must drive the capacitance 814 during a conversion operation. By reducing the number of comparators in the “window,” the value of C T can be reduced, in addition to the power consumption. However, the amplifier 810 must still drive this input with a capacitance.
- FIG. 9 there is illustrated a simplified diagram of the disclosed ADC of FIG. 7 , which is utilized for comparison therewith to the prior art embodiment of FIG. 8 .
- the resistive string comprised of the resistors 722 are driven by an upper current source 902 from the supply voltage, V DD , and the bottom of the resistive string is driven with a lower current source 904 .
- Both of these current sources provide a current I REF , which is variable.
- This variable current source varies the current through the resistors 722 and, therefore, sets the size of the LSB or, more specifically, the resolution of the ADC.
- the voltage on the node 734 is a negative input voltage and this provides the center reference voltage of the window with the current sources 902 and 904 in conjunction with the current through the resistors, providing the LSB voltage increments increasing toward current source 902 and decreasing toward current source 904 .
- the voltage across node resistors 722 does not vary, as that voltage is controlled by the current sources 902 and 904 .
- the current value of the current sources 902 and 904 is varied, then the size of the LSB voltage will vary.
- G 1 LSB ⁇ ⁇ size
- the current through the resistor string is a ratiometric current such that it is the current through the resistor string 710 multiplied by a ratio metric factor ⁇ .
- the current through the resistor string of resistors 722 provided by transistors 718 and 726 is: V BG 5 ⁇ ⁇ R ⁇ ⁇ where:
- the value of R is removed from the equation such that temperature and process variations therein do not affect the value of the LSB. All that is necessary is to have a stable voltage, this provided by the bandgap voltage generator.
- FIGS. 10 and 10 a there is illustrated a logic diagram for a comparator bank, each comparator bank representing each of the comparators 740 .
- This comparator string is a differential comparator having a positive input and a negative input.
- the positive input is connected to the positive input voltage on the node 742 which is connected to the voltage V IN+ .
- the other input is connected to a node 1002 which is the tap voltage V TAP , this reference input to the comparator.
- Node 1002 is connected to one side of a switch 1010 , the other side thereof connected to node 1006 .
- the output of comparator 1004 is provided on differential outputs 1020 and 1022 .
- Output 1020 is connected to one side of a sample capacitor 1024 and the node 1022 is connected to one side of a sample capacitor 1026 , both having a value of “C.”
- the other side of the capacitor 1024 is connected to a node 1028 , which comprises one input of a second comparator 1030 .
- the other side of capacitor 1026 is connected to a node 1032 , which is connected to the other input of the comparator 1030 , the comparator 1030 being a differential input comparator.
- Node 1028 is connected to one side of a switch 1034 , and the other side thereof is connected to a differential output node 1036 of comparator 1030 .
- node 1032 is connected to one side of a switch 1038 , the other side thereof connected to a second differential output node 1040 of differential comparator 1030 .
- Nodes 1036 and 1040 are connected to the differential inputs of a reconfigurable latch 1042 .
- Switches 1034 and 1038 are controlled by a clock signal ⁇ 1 ′.
- the reconfigurable latch 1042 is controlled by a clock signal ⁇ 3 .
- the reconfigurable latch 1042 is operable to provide a latched output on differential outputs 1044 and 1046 for input to the dynamic latch 1048 , which is controlled by a clock signal ⁇ 4 . This provides a latched output for input to a T-latch 1046 , which is clocked by a clock signal to provide a data output, this being the output of the overall comparator 740 .
- ⁇ 1 goes low at an edge 1106 and ⁇ 2 goes high at an edge 1108 , thus opening switches 742 and 1010 and closing switches 1014 and 1016 .
- This in effect, disposes the nodes 1020 and 1022 at the same voltage or substantially the same voltage, thus “boosting” the other side of capacitors 1024 and 1026 to the voltages that were previously on the nodes 1020 and 1022 .
- the voltage on the input to the comparator 1004 on nodes 1008 , 1006 comprises the difference voltage V IN+ ⁇ V TAP .
- the output voltage of the comparator 1004 will have an offset voltage V OS1 associated therewith. This offset voltage and difference voltage will be multiplied by the gain of comparator 1004 , a gain A 1 .
- the output voltage on nodes 1020 and 1022 will be A 1 (V IN + ⁇ V TAP +V OS1 ).
- ⁇ 2 goes high at 1108 , this represents the “hold” operation. Therefore, this represents a sample and hold operation.
- switches 1014 and 1016 are closed, the voltage across nodes 1020 and 1022 is V OS1 and, therefore, the voltage across nodes 1028 and 1032 will now be (V IN+ ⁇ V TAP ), such that the offset voltage associated with the comparator 1004 is effectively removed in the hold operation.
- the capacitors 1024 and 1026 are isolated from nodes 742 and 1002 .
- the analog input voltage that is input on node 742 will not be required to drive a large capacitance.
- the amplifier 732 isolates the negative input voltage on node 730 from node 734 and from all the subsequent tap voltages.
- the input voltage on node 742 is required to drive the inputs of each of the multiple comparators 740 .
- the sampling operation requires a larger capacitance for the purpose of holding the charge for a predetermined amount of time.
- this larger capacitor is disposed on the opposite side of comparator 1004 , it can be seen that the need for driving a very large capacitance and holding the voltage on that large capacitance is reduced, as the charge driven to the capacitor is driven from internal circuitry to the comparator 1004 , as opposed to a driving circuit associated with the node 742 .
- the drive of the sampling capacitors is distributed among all of the comparators 740 .
- the transistor 718 is comprised of four binary weighted transistors 1202 , 1204 , 1206 and 1208 , each of these being a p-channel transistor having the source/drain path thereof connected on one side thereof to the supply voltage V DD .
- the other side of the source/drain path thereof is connected to the node 720 .
- the gate of transistor 1202 is connected through the source/drain path of a p-channel transistor 1210 to node 714 , the gate thereof connected to bit b 0 -Bar.
- the gate of transistor 1204 is connected to node 714 through the source/drain path of a p-channel transistor 1212 , the gate thereof connected to bit b 1 -Bar.
- the gate of transistor 1206 is connected to node 714 through the source/drain path of a p-channel transistor 1214 , the gate thereof connected to bit b 2 -Bar.
- the gate of transistor 1208 is connected to node 714 through the source/drain path of a p-channel transistor 1216 , the gate thereof connected to bit b 3 -Bar. Therefore, when the respective bits are a logic “high,” then the respective gate transistors 1210 - 1216 will connect the gate of the respective transistors 1202 - 1208 to node 714 .
- Transistors 1202 - 1208 are binary weighted in size.
- the transistor 1202 has a size of , for reference purposes, 1 ⁇
- transistor 1204 has a size of 2 ⁇
- transistor 1206 has a size of 4 ⁇
- transistor 1208 has a size of 8 ⁇ . Therefore, the amount of current that will flow through the transistors is correspondingly larger. This provides the binary weighting, a fairly conventional weighted current scheme.
- a pull-up p-channel transistor 1220 has the source/drain path thereof connected between the gate of transistor 1202 and a supply voltage V DD , and the gate thereof connected to bit b 0 .
- a pull-up p-channel transistor 1222 has the source/drain path thereof connected between V DD and the gate of transistor 1204 and the gate thereof connected to bit b 1 .
- a pull-up p-channel transistor 1224 has the source/drain path thereof connected between V DD and the gate of transistor 1206 and the gate thereof connected to bit b 2 .
- a pull-up p-channel transistor 1226 has the source/drain path thereof connected between V DD and the gate of transistor 1208 and the gate thereof connected to bit b 3 .
- the transistor 726 is comprised of four n-channel transistors 1230 , 1232 , 1234 and 1236 having the source/drain paths thereof connected between node 724 and ground and sized in a binary weighted manner similar to transistors 1202 - 1208 , such that they are respectively identical thereto in size.
- the gate of transistor 1230 is connected to node 728 through an n-channel transistor 1238 , the gate thereof connected to bit b 0 .
- the gate of transistor 1232 is connected through an n-channel gate transistor 1240 to node 728 , the gate thereof connected to bit b 1 .
- the gate of transistors 1234 is connected through an n-channel gate transistor 1242 to node 728 , the gate thereof connected to bit b 2 .
- the gate of transistor 1236 is connected through an n-channel gate transistor 1244 to node 728 , the gate thereof connected to the bit b 3 .
- the binary weighted transistors 1230 - 1236 can be selectively connected between node 724 and ground.
- the gates thereof are pulled low through the source/drain paths of pull-down n-channel transistors 1246 , 1248 , 1250 and 1252 , respectively.
- the gates of transistors 1246 - 1252 are connected to bits b 0 -Bar, b 1 -Bar, b 2 -Bar and b 3 -Bar, respectively.
- FIG. 13 there is illustrated a schematic diagram of the comparator 1004 .
- This is a differential input comparator that is comprised of two differential input n-channel transistors 1302 and 1304 having the sources thereof connected in a common source configuration to a common source node 1306 .
- Node 1306 is connected through the source/drain path of an n-channel transistor 1305 to ground, the gate thereof connected to a bias voltage on anode 1308 .
- a diode connected n-channel transistor 1310 has the source/drain path thereof connected between node 1308 and ground and the gate thereof connected to node 1308 . This provides the bias for the node 1306 for the transistor 1305 .
- the drain of transistor 1302 is connected to a negative output node 1312 and the drain of transistor 1304 is connected to a node 1314 , the positive output node.
- a cross coupled p-channel transistor pair comprised of a p-channel transistor 1316 connected between V DD and node 1312 a tap-channel transistor 1318 connected between V DD and node 1314 is configured such that the gate of transistor 1316 is connected to the opposite node, node 1314 , and the gate of transistor 1318 is connected to the opposite node, node 1312 .
- a diode connected p-channel transistor 1320 is connected between V DD and node 1312 , the gate thereof connected to node 1312 .
- a diode connected p-channel transistor 1324 is connected between V DD and node 1314 , the gate thereof connected to node 1314 .
- the gate of transistor 1302 is the positive input and the gate of transistor 1304 is the negative input.
- FIG. 14 there is illustrated a schematic diagram of the comparator 1030 .
- This is a differential input comparator that is comprised of two differential input n-channel transistors 1402 and 1404 having the sources thereof connected in a common source configuration to a common source node 1406 .
- Node 1406 is connected through the source/drain path of an n-channel transistor 1405 to ground, the gate thereof connected to a bias voltage on a node 1408 .
- a diode connected n-channel transistor 1410 has the source/drain path thereof connected between node 1408 and ground and the gate thereof connected to node 1408 . This provides the bias for the node 1406 for the transistor 1405 .
- the drain of transistor 1402 is connected to a negative output node 1412 and the drain of transistor 1404 is connected to a node 1414 , the positive output node.
- a cross coupled p-channel transistor pair comprised of a p-channel transistor 1416 connected between V DD and node 1412 and a p-channel transistor 1418 connected between V DD and node 1414 is configured such that the gate of transistor 1416 is connected to the opposite node, node 1414 , and the gate of transistor 1418 is connected to the opposite node, node 1412 .
- a diode connected p-channel transistor 1420 is connected between V DD and node 1412 , the gate thereof connected to node 1412 .
- a diode connected p-channel transistor 1424 is connected between V DD and node 1414 , the gate thereof connected to node 1414 .
- the gate of transistor 1402 is a positive input and the gate of transistor 1404 is the negative input. This is a conventional design.
- a p-channel transistor 1440 that has the source/drain path thereof connected between nodes 1412 and 1414 and provides a short circuit for a short duration of time prior to the leading edge of ⁇ 1 ′ to prevent kickback.
- the gate of transistor 1440 is connected to a clock signal ⁇ 1 pre , such that, when activated, the gain of the comparator stage 1030 is substantially reduced. This clock signal is not shown in FIG. 11 .
- FIG. 15 there is illustrated a schematic diagram of the reconfigurable latch 1042 .
- This latch has two modes of operation. In the first mode, the gain is set at a relatively low gain and, in a second mode, the gain is increased substantially.
- the input is provided by a common source pair of differential input n-channel transistors 1502 and 1504 , having the source thereof connected to a common source node 1506 .
- the n-channel transistor 1510 is connected between node 1506 and ground with the gate thereof connected to a bias voltage on a node 1508 .
- the drain of transistor 1502 is connected to a negative output node 1512 and the drain of transistor 1504 is connected to a node 1514 , the positive output node.
- a cross-coupled pair of p-channel transistors 1516 and 1518 is provided, with the source/drain path of transistor 1516 connected between V DD and node 15 and the source/drain path of transistor 1518 connected between V DD and node 1514 .
- the gate of transistor 1516 is connected to node 1514 and the gate of transistor 1518 is connected to node 1512 .
- a p-channel transistor 1520 has the source/drain path thereof connected between nodes 1514 and 1512 and the gate thereof connected to a node 1524 .
- a diode connected p-channel transistor 1526 is connected between V DD and a node 1528 (p-channel), the gate thereof connected to node 1528 .
- a second diode connected p-channel transistor 1530 is connected between node 1528 and node 1524 , the gate thereof connected to node 1524 .
- An n-channel transistor 1532 is connected between node 1524 and ground, the gate thereof connected to the bias voltage on node 1508 .
- Ap-channel transistor 1534 has the source/drain path thereof connected V DD and node 1524 , the gate thereof connected to the clock signal ⁇ 3 .
- the transistor 1520 is operated in the triode region and, therefore, when turned on, constitutes a resistor.
- the input impedance looking into the source of transistor 1516 and into the source of transistor 1518 is equal to ⁇ 1/g m .
- transistor 1520 When transistor 1520 is turned on, it provides a resistance, R 1520 , that is disposed in parallel with this impedance. Initially, this is a negative impedance until a transistor is turned on, at which time it is impedance above zero, which, when turned on, results in a relatively low gain. When turned off, the gain goes high. Thus, when ⁇ 3 goes high, node 1524 is biased to place the transistor 1520 in the triode region. This occurs at an edge 910 on the waveform ⁇ 3 in FIG. 11 . This occurs prior to the switches 1014 and 1016 closing in response to ⁇ 2 going high at the edge 1108 . Thus, prior to the sample operation, the latch 1042 is configured for a low gain operation.
- the reconfigurable latch 1042 When ⁇ 2 goes high at edge 1108 , the reconfigurable latch 1042 will evaluate the difference voltage at the gates of transistors 1502 and 1504 which will result in a difference voltage generated across the output nodes 1512 and 1514 with a gain of two. When ⁇ 3 goes low at an edge 1112 , this value will be latched on the outputs.
- FIG. 17 there is illustrated a schematic diagram of the dynamic latch 1048 .
- two n-channel gate transistors 1702 and 1704 for connecting the positive and negative inputs associated therewith to respective nodes 1706 and 1708 , the gates of transistors 1702 and 1704 gated by the ⁇ 2 clock signal.
- Two common source n-channel transistors 1710 and 1712 have the sources thereof connected to a common source node 1714 and the drains thereof connected respectively to nodes 1706 and 1708 .
- An n-channel transistor 1716 is connected between node 1714 and ground and controlled by the ⁇ 4 clock signal.
- transistors 1710 and 1712 will be connected to ground when ⁇ 4 is a logic “high.”
- Node 1706 is associated with a positive output and node 1708 is associated with a negative output.
- Two cross-coupled p-channel transistors 1720 and 1722 are provided, transistor 1720 connected between a node 1724 and node 1706 and transistor 1722 connected between node 1724 and node 1708 .
- the gate of transistor 1720 is connected to node 1708 and the gate of transistor 1722 is connected to node 1706 .
- a p-channel gate transistor 1726 is provided for connection between V DD and node 1724 and the gate thereof connected to the clock signal ⁇ 4 -Bar. Thus, when transistor 1726 is turned on, node 1724 is connected to V DD .
- the differential output of the reconfigurable latch is connected to nodes 1706 and 1708 .
- this latch is essentially powered down until the evaluation phase is complete and ⁇ 4 goes high at an edge 114 , the same time that ⁇ 2 goes low at a negative falling edge 116 .
- the output of the reconfigurable latch which is provided at the falling edge of ⁇ 3 , falling edge 112 , will be disposed on nodes 1706 , and 1708 while the latch 1048 is powered down.
- transistors 1702 and 1704 are turned off, then the voltage on nodes 1706 and 1708 is “latched” into the latch 1048 by turning on transistors 1716 and 1726 . This provides an output to the transmit latch 846 .
- the PID block 540 is comprised of three paths that are summed with a summing junction 1802 .
- the first path provides a proportional relationship with a block 1804
- the second path provides an integration function with an integration block 1806
- the third block provides a differentiation path with a block 1808 .
- this is referred as a PID controller.
- the proportional block 1804 has a steady state proportional gain, K p , and provides zero phase lag.
- the integral path and integration block 1806 has an integral gain, K i , which generally reduces the steady state error. There is some phase lag associated with this.
- the differential path associated with the differentiation block 1808 has a derivative gain, K d , which provides some phase lead by anticipating future operations.
- the overall PID block 540 provides phase compensation for the overall control loop.
- the output of the summing junction 1802 is input to, as described hereinabove, either a low pass filter 550 or a sinc filter 552 .
- the low pass filter 550 is comprised of a block 1810 that has associated therewith a low pass filter frequency response with two poles. This is passed through an amplification stage 1812 with another coefficient associated with the amplification, this being the coefficient that is controlled by the microcontroller 440 .
- a 1 , a 2 and a 3 that control the operation of the lowpass filter function, these being the coefficients of the low pass filter.
- the sinc filter 552 is basically comprised of a summing block or an accumulation block 1814 , which is operable to sum over a range of delay values, this being a decimation type sinc filter.
- a gain factor is provided by an amplification stage 1816 which has a coefficient a 0 associated therewith. This a 0 will set the position of the sinc filter notch, as will be described hereinbelow.
- a multiplexer 1818 is operable to select between the output of amplification stage 1812 and the amplification stage 1816 for input to the DPWM 406 .
- FIG. 19 there is illustrated a more detailed block diagram of the PID 540 and the lowpass filter 550 and the sinc filter 552 .
- the proportional path of the block 1804 has again stage 1902 associated therewith with the gain factor K p . This is controlled by the PID control block 542 .
- the integral block has a gain block 1904 associated therewith with the integral gain factor K i . The output of this is passed through a transfer function 1/( 1 ⁇ z ⁇ 1 ) in a block 1906 . The output of this block is input to the summing junction 1802 .
- the integration path and the block 1808 are comprised of a gain block 1908 with a differential gain K d .
- the output of this gain block 1908 is input to a delay block 1910 to provide the delay (1 ⁇ z ⁇ 1 ).
- the output of block 1910 is input to the summing junction 1802 .
- a multiplexer 1970 having one input thereof connected to the input 1901 and the other input connected to a digital word with a value of “0.”
- the output of the multiplexer 1970 is input to the input of the gain block 1904 .
- the “0” value can be selected such that the integration path is on hold. This will be described in more detail hereinbelow.
- the low pass filter is configured with an input summing junction 1912 , the output thereof connected to a delay block 1914 with a delay of z ⁇ 1 .
- the output of delay block 1914 is connected to a node 1916 , which node 1916 has a signal associated therewith fed back through a coefficient block 1918 with a coefficient a 2 , the output thereof input to the summing block 1912 .
- Node 1916 is also input to one input of a summing junction 1918 , the output thereof connected to the input of a coefficient block 1920 , the output thereof providing the output of the low pass filter on a node 1922 .
- the input to delay block 1914 is also input to summing junction 1912 .
- Node 1916 is input through a delay block 1924 with a delay z ⁇ 1 , the output thereof input through a coefficient block 1926 with a coefficient a, to another input of the summing junction 1912 .
- the lowpass filter control block 558 sets the coefficients a 1 , a 2 and a 3 . In general, this is a Butterworth configuration low pass filter, a fairly conventional digital filter.
- the sinc filter is comprised of an input summing junction 1930 , the output thereof input through a delay block 1932 with a delay of z ⁇ 1 , the output thereof input to a coefficient block 1934 , the output thereof providing the output of the sinc filter 552 , coefficient block 1934 having the coefficient a 0 associated therewith, this coefficient provided by the sinc control block 556 .
- the output of delay block 1932 is also fed back to the input of summing junction 1930 to provide the accumulation operation.
- This delay block 1932 has a reset input associated therewith which is reset at a predetermined time. As noted hereinabove, this is a decimation type sinc filter.
- the output of both the low pass filter and the sinc filter are input to respective inputs of the multiplexer 554 . This provides the u(n) error signal.
- the lowpass filter of the sinc filter can be selected, depending upon the particular application and the desire of the applications engineer.
- FIGS. 20 a and 20 b there is illustrated frequency and phase plots for the response over frequency of the PID. It can be seen that there is a single pole at DC and the response will roll off until the first zero, at which time the response will flatten out until the second zero. At the second zero, the response changes in a positive manner, this due primarily to the differentiator term. However, it can be seen that without some type of filtering, the gain at high frequencies will be fairly high. This is the difference between a digital controller and an analog controller wherein the analog controller has an inherent low pass filter at the higher frequencies.
- the phase also exhibits a similar property wherein the phase is initially 90° and falls slightly to the first zero where it goes positive and then at the second zero continues to increase. At high frequencies, the phase is significantly leading in nature.
- the high frequency portion of the PID response can be controlled.
- the corner frequency of the low pass filter cannot be too low or the phase associated therewith will cause instability in the loop.
- the switching frequency is around 500 KHz. It will be desirable to filter any noise associated with the switching frequency and, therefore, it will be desirable from a filtering standpoint to move the corner frequency of the low pass filter at or below this frequency. However, this would cause significant phase instability in the control loop. This is where the sinc filter will be beneficial.
- the sinc filter results in a plurality of “notches” at multiples of the sampling frequency, such that a notch can be placed at the switching frequency of the power supply.
- the sinc filter is a decimation type filter.
- the decimation ratio is defined as the ratio of the sampling frequency of the controller divided by the switching frequency of the power supply, the desired notch. If the sampling frequency f s , is set at 10 MHz and the switching frequency of the power supply, f sw , is equal to 500 kHz, that summation ratio would be equal to is f w , which results in zeros at integer multiples of the switching frequency. This is equal to (10 ⁇ 10 6 )/(500 ⁇ 10 3 ), which results in a decimation ratio of 20. Therefore, a notch would exist at 500 kHz, 1 MHz, 1.5 MHz and finally at 5 MHz, f s /2. Therefore, the accumulator would accumulate 20 samples and then be reset, at which time it would provide an output.
- the input 1901 of the PID is input along three paths, as noted hereinabove.
- the proportional path utilizes a multiplier 2302 having one input connected to the node 1901 and the other input thereof for receiving the digital value of K p and providing on the output the result for input to a first summing junction 2304 .
- the integral path has a multiplier 2306 associated therewith having one input thereof connected to the input 1901 and the other input thereof for multiplication with the output of an AND gate 2308 .
- One input of the AND gate is connected through an inverter node to an integrate hold enable signal, INTHLDEN, and the other input thereof connected to the K i integral constant.
- the output of multiplier 2306 is fed to the input of a summing junction 2308 for summing with the output of a feedback delay block 2310 which is operable to feedback the output from a node 2312 .
- the output of the summing junction 2308 is passed through a saturation block 2314 to a node 2312 .
- Node 2312 is input to the other input of the summing junction 2304 .
- the output of summing junction 2304 is input to a summing junction 2316 .
- the differentiator block has a summing node 2318 for receiving on the one input thereof the value on the node 1901 and on the other input thereof the value on node 1901 delayed by delay block 2320 , this input to a negative input such that the block 2318 is a difference block.
- the output of the difference block 2318 is input to a multiplication block 2322 for multiplication of the output of the summing block 2318 with the constant case K d .
- the output of multiplication block 2322 is input to the summing block 2316 .
- the summing block 2316 is input to a summing block 2324 , this operable to receive on the input thereof a programmable dither signal, generated by a programmable dither register 2326 . By changing the value of this programmable dither, the value output by the summing junction 2316 can be varied.
- the output of the summing junction 2324 comprises the PID output. This is input to the two filters.
- the low pass filter is configured with an AND gate 2330 , one input connected to the PID output and the other input thereof connected to the filter select signal, FILTERSEL-EAR.
- the output of the enable gate 2330 is input to a summing junction 2332 .
- the output of summing junction 2332 is input to the input of a summing junction 2334 , the output thereof connected through a saturate block 2336 to anode 2338 for input to a delay block 2340 , the output thereof connected to a node 2342 .
- Node 2342 is input to one input of a multiplication block 2344 , the other input thereof connected to the coefficient a 1 for multiplication therewith.
- the output of multiplication block 2344 is passed through a truncation block 2346 to truncate the value output therefrom for input to the other input of the summing junction 2334 on a negative input thereof to provide a subtraction operation with the summing junction 2334 .
- the output of node 2342 is also input through a delay block 2348 to the input of a multiplication block 2350 for multiplication with the a 2 coefficient.
- the output of multiplication block 2350 is truncated with a truncation block 2352 for input to a negative input on the summing junction 2332 such that a subtraction operation is performed by the summing junction 2332 .
- a summing junction 2358 is operable to the sum of the output of node 2342 and the output of node 2338 , the output thereof input to a multiplication block 2360 for multiplication with the a 3 coefficient.
- the output of multiplication block 2360 is input to a block 2362 for saturation of truncation and then to the input of the multiplexer 554 .
- the sinc filter is facilitated with an input selection AND gate 2364 having one input connected to the PID output and the other input connected to the filter select signal, FILTERSEL.
- the output of the gate 2364 is input to one input of a summing junction 2366 , the output thereof connected through a saturate block 2368 to a node 2370 .
- Node 2370 is connected through a delay block 2372 to an input of an AND gate 2374 .
- the output of AND gate 2374 is input to the other input of the summing junction 2366 .
- Node 2370 is also input to a multiplication block 2376 for multiplication with the sinc filter coefficient, a 0 , the output thereof connected to a saturate and truncation block 2378 for output to the other input of the multiplexer 554 .
- a different clock signal is utilized for delaying the output.
- a delay 2380 is provided on the output of the multiplexer 554 .
- a multiplexer 2382 selects the control signal for the delay 2380 to adjust the delay thereof. This either can be the raw clock signal or the raw clock signal divided by a factor of “N,” with a divide block 2384 .
- the clock signal is input to one input of the multiplexer 2380 and to the other input thereof through the divide block 2384 to provide the divide down clock signal.
- the divide down clock signal also provides the second input to the enable gate 2374 through inverting node thereon.
- the divide ratio provides the “reset” for the accumulation operation, the accumulation operation operating at the filter clock rate.
- the divide down “N” ratio sets the number of accumulations that will be allowed to occur before the reset, at which time the data output will be provided.
- FIG. 24 there is illustrated a Bode plot of the digital compensator with a low pass filter. It can be seen that, at DC, there is a pole and the first zero of the PID occurs at Fz 1 and the second zero occurs at Fz 2 . The response will increase at the second zero until the first pole of the low pass filter occurs, at Fp 1 , and the second pole occurs later at a pole Fp 2 . Thus, it can be seen that by moving the corner frequency of the low pass filter out from the switching frequency and the zeros of the PID, there will be some increase in the signal output by the PID. Of course, the two zeros of the PID could be identical and the two poles of the low pass filter could be closer together.
- FIG. 25 there is illustrated a frequency plot of the sinc filter operation in the frequency domain. It can be seen that, in this embodiment set forth hereinabove with respect to the example where the sampling frequency of the filter is 10 MHz and the switching frequency of the power supply is 500 kHz, there will be a notch 2502 placed proximate to the 500 kHz switching frequency. It is noted that this notch is programmable to the use of the coefficients utilized to realize the sinc filter, the decimation ratio, the sampling frequency and the switching frequency. By adjusting these values, the notch can be programmed for placement at the switching frequency of the power supply. This will result in a very quiet power supply, such that the switching frequency is effectively filtered out of the control loop.
- FIG. 26 there is illustrated a prior art voltage plot of the voltage output in the presence of positive and negative transients.
- the power supply is typically given some type of specification for the regulation, i.e., the regulation must be within predetermined limits. There is a high limit and a low limit. The reason that the voltage may go outside of the limits is due to ripple or due to transient responses. The ripple is typically very tightly controlled. However, transient current surges can cause the voltage to increase or decrease.
- FIG. 26 there are illustrated a positive transient and a negative transient. A positive transient will occur whenever a load is quickly removed from the output of the power supply and a negative transient will occur when a load is applied.
- a typical value of a capacitor to accommodate transients would be 100 microfarads.
- a single discrete capacitor would typically utilize an electrolytic capacitor.
- these electrolytic capacitors have high ESRs.
- For DC voltages there would be no dissipation, but, for even a small ripple, there would be some heating of the capacitor. This heating could cause failure of the capacitor, which is why ceramic capacitors are favored.
- power supply manufacturers utilize a plurality of the power supply capacitors disposed in parallel. Thus, for large capacitors, there can be a large part count and, therefore, it is desirable to reduce this part count.
- the control of the reference DAC 506 that is part of the reference generator 410 it is possible through the control of the reference DAC 506 that is part of the reference generator 410 , to be controlled to reposition the set point for the reference input to the ADC 408 .
- the set point is positioned higher than median voltage and closer to the higher limit than the low limit.
- the regulated DC voltage is disposed proximate the high limit.
- the set point When high current is present, the set point is disposed proximate to the lower limit of the power supply specifications. When the load is removed, which would be expected, then a positive transient would occur and, with the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 27 b , the transient can have a magnitude that his approximately equal to the difference between the high and low limits in the specification.
- FIGS. 28 a and 28 b illustrate this aspect.
- the voltage is positioned proximate the high limit and for the high currents, the voltage is positioned proximate the lower limit. Illustrated in FIG. 28 a is the current and 28 b is the output voltage position, i.e., the set point.
- superimposed on the current in phantom at the low current level is a current transient 2802 . This results in a transient in the voltage in the transient 2804 in voltage that is negative going.
- FIG. 29 there is illustrated a flow chart for the voltage positioning operation. This is initiated at a start block 2902 and the proceeds to a block 2904 to sense the current.
- the current is sensed with a Hall effect sensor 460 which generates a voltage output proportional to the current, these being conventional devices.
- This current is sensed and input to one of analog inputs to the chip and converted to a digital voltage with the SAR ADC converter 660 .
- This is stored in the associated SFR/LIM register and can be examined by the core processor 602 . Of course, any time the current exceeds the internal limit, this is accommodated by other circuitry.
- the value of V REF output by the reference DAC 506 is then set.
- This is set in accordance with a look-up table that can be stored in the memory or any other manner to set the values of the steps, including a simple algorithm. It could be that the voltage is positioned at three points, one when the voltage is above a threshold, one when it is below a threshold and one when it is between the thresholds. However, even finer graduations could be facilitated through the use of a look-up table.
- FIG. 30 there is illustrated a block diagram of a method for determining the total current. Hall sensors are fairly expensive and, therefore, a different technique is disclosed for measuring the currents and determining the change to the reference voltage to be made.
- a half bridge power supply section 3002 which includes on the output side a series inductor 3004 .
- an internal resistance 3006 Associated with this series inductor 3004 is an internal resistance 3006 with a resistive value.
- the current through the resistor 3006 is determined with a current detector 3008 , which will be described in more detail hereinbelow. This provides the inductor current to the output node 3010 wherein the output voltage V O is provided.
- the output current, I OUT is output therefrom. Disposed between this output node and ground is the load capacitor 3012 , C OUT . This has associated therewith an internal resistance 3040 .
- a current detector 3014 is disposed between the bottom plate of the capacitor 3012 and ground. The current detected by the current source 3008 is multiplied by a gain factor and input to a summing junction 3016 . Similarly, the current detected by the current detector 3014 is multiplied by a factor and input to the summing junction 3016 . In general, the ratio between the two internal resistors 3006 and 3014 determines what the multiplication factor is in both of the current detect legs. Additionally, the output voltage V O is input to the summing junction 3016 .
- the output of the summing junction 3016 is an intermediate voltage V I .
- the output of the summing junction is then input to a summing junction 3018 to subtract the term I OUT R ESR2 from the value of V REF to provide the error voltage.
- This is input to a control block 3020 for input to the half bridge 3002 .
- This is one implementation, but it indicates that the current can be determined from looking at particular voltages associated with the operation of the inductor and the capacitor. Once the currents are known, then a factor can be determined, such as the voltage across the resistor, and this can be utilized to perform the voltage positioning. Alternatively, the absolute value of the current can be determined and a look-up table utilized.
- FIG. 31 there is illustrated a schematic of the technique for measuring the current across the resistor without utilizing a Hall sensor. This is facilitated by disposing a series RC network between one side of the inductor 3004 and the other side of the internal resistor 3006 . This is comprised of a resistor 3102 and a capacitor 3104 labeled R O and C O . This is a monitoring circuit.
- V O I OUT ( sL+R ESRZ )
- I OUT B x /
- FIG. 32 there is illustrated a diagrammatic view of the technique for determining the current through the capacitor.
- the capacitor is illustrated with an output capacitor 3202 , the large filter output capacitor which has the internal resistance 3204 .
- an output capacitor 3202 the large filter output capacitor which has the internal resistance 3204 .
- V O - I C ⁇ R ESR - I C sC O
- V O - I C ⁇ ( 1 + sR ESR ⁇ C O sC O )
- V CO - I C sC O ⁇ ( 1 + sR ESR ⁇ C O 1 + sR 1 ⁇ C 1 )
- R 1 C 1 R ESR C O
- V CO I C sC O
- V CO V O +I C R ESR
- FIG. 33 there is illustrated an embodiment illustrating the current sensing of the inductor current and the capacitor current of the embodiments of FIGS. 31 and 32 .
- the voltage V x from the junction between resistor 3102 and capacitor 3104 is input to one side of a summing junction 3302 , the other side connected to the output voltage V O .
- the voltage V CO from the junction between resistor 3206 and resistor 3208 is input to a summing junction 3304 . Both summing junctions 3302 and 3304 are operable to subtract the voltage V CO and V X from the output voltage.
- the V CO output at the junction between resistors 3206 and 3208 is also provided as analog input. All the microcontroller requires is knowledge of the values of the resistor 3006 and the resistor 3014 in order to determine the current through the inductor and capacitor, respectively.
- the functions R ESR /R 1 is a constant that can be determined from known values and this utilized in the microcontroller to perform the operations of the summing junctions 3302 , 3304 and 3306 and the normalization stage.
- the DPWM 416 is a state machine that is operable to generate up to six phases for use in driving external drivers that will control switches on the switching power converter. Each of these phases will be defined by a leading edge and a trailing edge, either leading or trailing edge being rising or falling.
- Either the u(n) signal from the digital compensator 412 or a microcontroller generated PID value from the register 564 is provided on the bus 570 as an input to the DPWM 416 .
- the original u(n) represents a number of clock cycles that the PHI output is turned on per frame.
- the DPWM 416 provides for highly flexible operation, which is operable to accommodate various pulse width and phase modulation schemes. Phase-to-phase timing can be programmed for fixed (or zero) dead time, or the microcontroller 440 can dynamically control dead time during converter operation.
- the DPWM 416 may be clocked at 200 MHz (5 nS resolution) or 50 MHz (20 nS resolution), depending on the setting associated therewith, these clocks generated by the PLL. It is noted that the DPWM is a state machine, such that, for each clock cycle, there is a result output by the state machine, as compared to an instruction based microprocessor or a DSP solution.
- the first path is associated with a Symmetry Lock logic block 3402 , which is operable to interface with a Symmetry Lock SFR in the microcontroller 440 .
- Symmetry Lock SFR Symmetry Lock SFR in the microcontroller 440 .
- the Symmetry Lock logic block 3402 is operable to latch each value output by the multiplexer 566 upon receiving a Data Ready signal.
- the digital compensator 412 operates at a clock rate of 10 MHz with a switching frequency of 500 kHz, for example, there will be many more samples of u(n) during a particular switching frame than may be required. However, u(n) can be changing and there may be modulation schemes and phase schemes that require an edge of the pulse to be sent based upon current data.
- the block 3402 latches each value and, upon the occurrence of a predetermined lock condition, the data will be “locked” into the logic block 3402 . This situation occurs when, for example, the trailing edge of PH 1 requires current data to determine the position thereof.
- a system may be set up that, for example, the leading edge of PH 1 , a relative edge to the trailing edge of PH 1 , calculates its position relative to PH 1 based upon the locked data in the logic block 3402 .
- Each of the summation blocks 3404 and 3406 is operable to receive a 2's complement correction data value from a correction data SFR, labeled TLCD 0 and TLCD 1 , respectively, which basically each provide an offset.
- TLCD 0 and TLCD 1 respectively, which basically each provide an offset.
- each of the paths flows to an associated limit block 3408 and 3410 , respectively, which will provide a corrected u(n).
- the limit block 3408 is associated with the summation block 3404 and receives high and low limits, TLGT 0 and TLLT 0 , wherein the limit block 3410 associated with the summation block 3406 receives high and low limits TLGT 1 and TLLT 1 , these limits associated with respective SFRs.
- Each of the four corrected u(n) values form the blocks 3408 , 3410 , 3416 and 3420 are input to a timing generator 3422 which generates the phase values for output to a timing generator bypass logic block 3424 .
- the length of a switching cycle can be defined by signal SWC_CYC and there is also provided via control of the microcontroller 440 a start of cycle signal DPWM_EN.
- the polarity of the initial pulse edge, rising or falling, is determined by PH_POL.
- the clock input of latch 3504 is connected to the output of a leading/trailing edge select block 3508 which is controlled by the bit ULCK 0 _EDG bit of the register 3502 . This is operable to select either the leading or trailing edge of one of the six phases PH 1 -PH 6 that are selected by a multiplexer 3510 . This is controlled by the first three bits of the register 3502 .
- the latch is operable to latch each value of the u(n) data therein.
- the output of the latch 3504 is input to the trim and limit blocks 3512 and 3514 , associated with the blocks 3404 , 3408 , 3406 and 3410 of FIG. 34 .
- a multiplexer 3516 controlled by the bits 4 - 6 of register 3502 for selecting one of the six phases and inputting that to a leading/trailing edge select block 3518 , the output thereof driving the clock input of the latch 3506 .
- the latch 3506 is associated with two trim and limit blocks 3520 and 3522 , that correspond to blocks 3414 and 3416 , and blocks 3418 and 3420 .
- the timing generator 3422 is comprised of a plurality of multiplexers and phase generators. Each path has a multiplexer 3526 associated therewith and a phase generator 3528 , each of these being a pattern generator. Each multiplexer 3526 is operable to receive all four of the corrected u(n) values and, depending upon which one is mapped to the particular phase path, input that to the associated pattern generator 3528 . The corrected u(n) values are mapped to one of the PHn outputs in any combination using the PHn_CNTL 0 registers in the timing generator 3422 . The pattern generators 3528 independently generate the PHn outputs responsive to the corrected u(n) values and the PHN_CNTL 0 register values. This enables positive, negative or system management processor controlled dead times between the outputs which will be more filly discussed below. Each PHn output has its own pattern generator 3528 which may be programmed to be modulated by any u(n) value.
- the min/max logic 3408 , 3410 , 3416 , 3420 determines the min/max range of each adder output is within the limiter settings on the associated low limit register (TTLTn) and high limit register (TLGTn).
- a multiplexer 3630 is operable to be disposed between each of the outputs of the limiters 3408 , 3410 , 3416 and 3420 for forcing the operand to “0” such that the duty cycle of the output PH 1 -PH 6 will be terminated when ICYC IRQ happens. This provides protection to the system from exposure to long term overcurrent conditions. Note that, although the multiplexer 3630 is illustrated as a single multiplexer, there is actually a separate multiplexer for each cu(n) output.
- each PHn output is controlled by the programmed settings in the control registers PHN_CNTL 0 through PHn_CNTL 3 .
- Each phase output is allowed to have a maximum of two transitions per switching cycle.
- Programming the DPWM consists of initializing the control registers, then programming the leading and trailing edge control registers for each PHn output that is used in the application. In this way, the dead times between control signals of complementary switches may be programmed using the pattern generators 3528 as described below.
- Each of the phase generators is divided into two sections, one for processing the leading edge and one for processing a trailing edge.
- each phase generator is based upon a leading or trailing edge. It is the generation and positioning of this edge that is handled by the state machine.
- Each edge is associated with a specific timing type.
- the timing type is an absolute time, wherein edge is defined as one that unconditionally occurs at a specific time-tick.
- Relative time is associated with an edge that occurs a prescribed time after its reference edge transitions. For example, normally PH 1 has a leading edge that occurs at time-tick # 1 with a pulse width that is defined as a finite value of the u(n).
- the leading edge of PH 2 is a relative edge, in some power converters, wherein the leading edge thereof occurs a number of time-ticks after the falling edge of PH 1 .
- Another is hardware modulation timing, which is associated with an edge that occurs at a time specified by the value of one of the four corrected u(n) modulation terms.
- Each of the leading edge and trailing edge functionalities have associated therewith a portion of the multiplexer 3526 .
- the leading edge portion has a multiplexer 3702 associated therewith which is operable to select one of the four corrected u(n) values, or a “relative” or a “absolute” input. These inputs are provided by the PHn_CNTL as one register for the lowermost eight bits and a ninth bit from the PHn_CNTL 0 register. These are SFR control registers. This provides a leading edge control value for the leading edge portion. Configuration data is provided that is the select input to the multiplexer 3702 and is provided by the three lowermost bits of a PHn_CNTL 0 SFR.
- the information in these three bits is also input, along with the output of the multiplexer 3702 , to a phase bit logic block 3704 that is operable to carry out the operations associated with defining the leading edge and defining the trailing edge.
- a control value is what is provided by the multiplexer 3702 .
- the reference phases are provided by multiplexer 3706 that selects between one of the six phases as a reference phase in the event that this is a relative edge created. This multiplexer is controlled by the four lowermost bits of the PHn_CNTL 0 SFR.
- the trailing edge is handled in a similar manner to the leading edge in that a multiplexer 3710 is provided for receiving the four corrected u(n) values and also Relative and Absolute inputs from the PHn_CNTL 3 control register and the eighth bit from the PHn_CNTL 2 register. This provides a trailing edge control.
- a multiplexer 3712 similar to the multiplexer 3706 , selects one of the PH 1 -PH 6 phases as the reference phase when a relative edge is being generated, and this is controlled by the four lowermost bits of the PHn_CNTL 2 register.
- PHn_CNTL2 Phase n Trailing Edge Control Register 2 Bit 7 PHnT(8): PHn Trailing Edge Timing Data Bit 8 This is bit 9 (MSB) of the PHn_CNTL1 register Bit 6-4 PHnT_SELn - 0: Phase 2 Trailing Edge Control Bits 000: PHn Trailing Edge Timing Determined by u(n)0 001: PHn Trailing Edge Timing Determined by u(n)1 010: PHn Trailing Edge Timing Determined by u(n)2 011: PHn Trailing Edge Timing Determined by u(n)3 100: PHn Trailing Edge Timing is Relative to Another Timing Edge 101: PHn Trailing Edge Timing is Relative to Another Timing Edge 110: PHn Trailing Edge Timing is Relative to Another Timing Edge 111: PHn Trailing Edge Timing is Absolute Bit 3 PHnT_EDGE: Relative Training Reference Edge Leading/ Trailing Edge Select 0:
- FIG. 38 there is illustrated a diagrammatic view of the bypass logic block 3424 .
- the bypass logic is operable to safeguard the power supply system by forcing each PH output into user-defined “safe” states during supply shutdown.
- the embodiment of FIG. 38 shows the bypass logic for each phase.
- An output multiplexer 3802 is operable to select, on one input, the output of the DPWM pattern generator 3422 , the default output, or one of three static pre-defined states contained in the Software Bypass (SWBP_OUT) SFR 3806 , the over-current protection fault (OCP_OUT) SFR 3808 , or the Enable (ENABX_OUT) bypass SFR 3810 .
- SWBP_OUT Software Bypass
- OCP_OUT over-current protection fault
- ENABX_OUT Enable bypass SFR 3810 .
- the three shutdown sources are the enable input, the over-current protection fault and the software bypass (noting that the software bypass is initiated by the microcontroller 440 ).
- Both the ENABLE input and the OCP are hardware shutdowns and are enabled by setting a bit in the DPWMCN register to a logic “1” which bit is the HWBP_EN bit.
- a supply shutdown occurs when either the enable input pin is forced to its off state or the over-current protection interrupt (OCPIRQ) interrupts are asserted. If both occur simultaneously, the higher priority ENABLE interrupt will prevail.
- the lowest priority shutdown source is software bypass, which is invoked by the microcontroller 440 by setting an SWBP bit in the DPWMCN register to a logic “1.” This is all facilitated with a priority encoder 3812 wherein the DPWMCN SFR is connected to the highest priority input through an AND gate 3814 on one input thereof, the ENABIRQ interrupt connected to the other input.
- the DPWMCN HWBP_EN bit is also input to one input of an AND gate 3816 , which has the output thereof connected to the second priority input, with the other input of AND gate 3816 connected to the OCPIRQ interrupt.
- the SWBP bit of the DPWMCN register is connected to one input of an AND gate 3818 , the output thereof connected to the lowest priority input of the encoder 3812 , the other inputs of the AND gate 3818 connected to the SVWBP_PHnEN bit associated with the particular phase.
- the transition from DPWM output to any of the three-defined states can be programmed to occur on switching frame boundaries, or instantaneously by setting the EMGY_EN bit of the DPWMCN register to a “1.”
- This is input to a control input of a multiplexer 3820 , which selects either the direct output of the priority encoder 3812 or the output of an end-of-frame synchronizer block 3824 disposed between the other input of multiplexer 3820 and the output of the priority encoder 3812 .
- the frame synchronizer block 3824 is controlled by the EOFIRQ, the end-of-frame interrupt. For this end-of-frame synchronizing, this indicates that all operations, the generation of all leading and trailing edges for all phases, will occur prior to the bypass mode. With the use of the bypass safeguards, the state of each of the phases can be predetermined. In this manner, it can be insured that a transistor will not be closed and power being directed toward an inductor to basically destroy the transistor or other parts of the power converter.
- FIG. 39 there is illustrated a timing diagram depicting the Sync Mode of operation.
- This mode allows the start of each switching cycle to be synchronized with an external clock.
- the user enables sync mode by assigning the SYNC input to the port I/O pins by setting a sync enable signal, SYNCEN, in the XBARO SFR and the SYNC_EN bit in the DPWMCN to a logic “1.”
- a logic level sync pulse is applied to the SYNC input of the integrated circuit, the positive edge of which triggers (or re-triggers) the start of a new switching operation, shown in FIG. 39 . It can be seen that when the SYNC input goes high, at an edge 3902 , the switching cycle will terminate.
- the SYNC pulse must return low a minimum of three clock cycles of the DPWM prior to the next positive transition, as illustrated in the associated detail.
- the switching cycle in execution is unconditionally terminated and the new switching cycle initiated on the positive edge 3902 of the SYNC pulse.
- SWC_CYC in SFR register defines the switching cycle period.
- FIG. 40 there is illustrated a timing diagram for the operation of frame skipping, with FIG. 41 illustrating a detail of the bypass operation of FIG. 38 .
- the SWBP_PHnEN bit of the SWBP_OUTEN SFR is input to one input of an AND gate 4102 , the other input thereof connected to the SWBP bit of the DPWMCN register.
- the SWBP_PHnEN bit of the SWBP_OUTEN SFR is input to one input of an AND gate 4102 , the other input thereof connected to the SWBP bit of the DPWMCN register.
- each PHn bit has a corresponding PHn enable bit in SWBP_OUTEN and a SWBP bit in SWBP_OUT.
- the end-of-frame interrupt interrupts the microcontroller 440 at the end of each switching cycle. When this occurs, the microcontroller 440 will clear the SWBP bit in DPWMCN register, forcing the output multiplexer 3802 for each PH output to pass either the DPWM output (active switching cycle), or the OFF state contained in SWBP_OUT.
- Frame skipping can be configured to skip any number of cycles. Normal (continuous active frame) load resumes when firmware detects an increase in output loading.
- FIG. 42 there is illustrated a flow chart depicting the operation of creating an edge in a driving pulse in the pattern generator.
- Each edge is created similar to another edge by this procedure, such that the pattern generator is operable to operate on edges, such that all that needs to be defined by the power supply designer is the parameters of an edge, whether it is an absolute edge, a relative edge, how many ticks to wait before generating the edge, whether it is a leading edge or a trailing edge and whether it is falling or rising.
- the program is initiated at a block 4202 wherein the referenced edge is selected in the appropriate phase, i.e., either the leading edge or the trailing edge.
- the program then flows to a decision block 4204 to determine if it is an absolute edge.
- An absolute edge is one that has a defined starting point from the edge of the initiation of the flame. If so, the program flows along the “Y” path to a function block 4206 to reset the base to a value of “0.” If it is not an absolute edge, then the program flows along the “N” path to a function block 4208 to monitor for the reference edge, i.e., to determine when the reference edge has occurred. This program flows to a decision block 4210 to determine if it has been triggered and it will maintain itself in a loop until such time, at which time it will flow along the “Y” path to a function block 4212 to latch the value of the DPWM counter as the base value. This basically sets the reference edge as the base.
- the program then flows to a decision block 4214 to determine if the corrected value of u(n) is selected. This is also the point in the program to which the function block 4206 flows. If the corrected u(n) is selected, the program flows along the “Y” path to a function block 4216 to select the corrected u(n) as the operand. If not, the program flows along the “N” path to a function block 4218 to select the value from the SFR register as the operand, this being a fixed value. Both function blocks 4216 and 4218 flow to a function block 4220 to set the expected value equal to the base value plus the value of the operand. The program then flows to a function block 4222 wherein the result is compared with the DPWM counter value.
- a decision block 4224 determines when the expected value is greater than or equal to the DPWM counter value, at which time it will flow along a “N” path to a function block 4226 to trigger the edge, i.e., create the edge.
- the program then flows to a function block 4228 to monitor for the end of frame interrupt and, if it occurs, the program will flow from a decision block 4230 along a “Y” path to a function block 4232 in order to reset the edge and the state machine, at which time the program will flow back to the input of function block 4202 .
- FIG. 43 there is illustrated a flow chart depicting the operation of selecting the value of u(n) from either the PID or the SFR.
- the program is initiated at a block 4302 and then proceeds to a block 4304 to monitor if the corrected u(n) value is ready for latching. As described hereinabove, the data is ready after it has been processed through the conversion cycle of the ADC and then passes through the digital compensator. At the digital compensator, for example, the sinc filter may take longer to process due to the decimation aspect thereof.
- the program then flows to a decision block 4306 to determine if a new u(n) is ready and, if not, it loops back to function block 4304 .
- the program flows to a decision block 4308 to determine if the Symmetry Lock edge has been triggered such that Symmetry Lock is present. If so, this indicates that the new u(n) should not be processed and the program flows back to the input of the function block 4304 . If not, the program then flows to a function block 4310 to latch the new u(n) into the register and then to a function block 4312 to correct the value of u(n) by the offset to provide a corrected value thereof. The program then flows to a decision block 4314 to determine if a corrected value of u(n) is less than the minimum limit and, if so, then it flows to a function block 4316 to set the corrected value of u(n) to the minimum limit.
- the program flows to a decision block 4318 to determine if the corrected value of u(n) is greater than the maximum and, if so, the program flows to a function block 4320 to set the corrected value of u(n) to the maximum limit. If neither limit has been breached, the program flows to a function block 4322 to leave the corrected value of u(n) unchanged and then to a decision block 4324 to determine if the ICYC interrupt has occurred. If so, the program flows to a function block 4326 to set the corrected value of u(n) to “0” and, if the interrupt has not occurred, the program flows to a function block 4328 to leave the corrected value of u(n) unchanged.
- the over current protection circuitry 4400 has provided thereto a voltage related to the output current IPK of the buck converter 402 .
- the output current IPK is measured via a hall sensor which provides the measured current output.
- the voltage related to the output current IPK is provided to the positive input of a comparator 4402 via input line 4404 .
- the switch 4406 on the input line 4404 is associated with the leading edge blanker circuit 4408 which will be more fully discussed herein below.
- the negative input of the comparator 4402 is connected to the output of a 4-bit programmable digital to analog controller (DAC) 4410 .
- DAC 4-bit programmable digital to analog controller
- the 4-bit programmable DAC 4410 provides a voltage related to the threshold current I TH to the negative input of comparator 4402 .
- the 4-bit programmable DAC 4410 is programmed to provide a desired threshold by a control register 4412 having a control value stored therein.
- the comparator 4402 compares the provided voltage related to the output current IPK of the buck converter 402 with the programmed voltage related to the threshold current I TH and when the voltage related to IPK exceeds the voltage related to the threshold current I TH , a primary interrupt (ICYCIRQ) is generated on line 4414 from the output of comparator 4402 .
- ICYCIRQ primary interrupt
- the value to which the voltage related to the I TH current is programmed by the digital to analog controller 4410 is based upon the limits of the buck converter 402 to which the DPWM is connected. Hysteresis for the comparator 4402 is controlled from hysteresis control values from a control register 4416 .
- the primary interrupt (ICYCIRQ) is provided to a clock input of 5-bit counter 4418 .
- the primary interrupt (OCYCIRQ) is also provided to the input of reset logic 4420 .
- the primary interrupt is output via line 4422 to the DPWM 416 , the controller 440 and to the integrator stage of the PID 540 .
- the present ICYC count from the 5-bit counter 4418 is compared with the OCP count limit, which is stored in register 4430 , at comparator 4428 , and if the ICYC count from the 5-bit counter 4418 equals the OCP count limit, a secondary interrupt OCPIRQ is generated from the comparator 4428 on output line 4432 .
- the secondary over current interrupt is provided to the DPWM 416 to indicate the occurrence of a serious over current condition.
- the primary over protection interrupt ICYCIRQ provides an indication of over current conditions which may or may not fix themselves in a next frame period.
- the occurrence of consecutive primary interrupt conditions are monitored by the 5-bit counter 4418 such that when a predetermined number of primary interrupts have occurred, the secondary interrupt OCPIRQ may be generated to indicate a more serious over current problem such as a dead short.
- the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ performs a number off functions within the switch power supply device described with respect to FIG. 1 .
- the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ is provided to the DPWM 416 such that each of the switches connected to the phase outputs of the DPWM 416 are turned off. Additionally, the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ is provided to the PID 540 to hold the integrator to prevent it from overloading.
- the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ is applied to a first input of OR gate 4470 .
- the second input of OR gate 4470 is connected to the integrator hold output from a latch 4472 .
- the output comprises the Q output of the latch 4472 .
- the output of OR gate 4470 is applied to an input of AND gate 4474 .
- the other input of AND gate 4474 is an inverted input of the end of frame interrupt EOFIRQ.
- the output of AND gate 4474 is connected to the D input of latch 4472 .
- a clock signal PWMCK is applied to the clock input of the latch 4472 .
- FIG. 44 c describes the operation of the circuit of FIG. 44 b .
- the integrator hold circuit monitors for the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ. Inquiry step 4482 determines if the ICYCIRQ interrupt has been detected. If not, control passes back to step 4480 . Once the primary interrupt is detected, the integrator hold circuit is initiated at step 4484 . Once the integrator hold circuit has been initiated, inquiry step 4486 determines if the end of frame interrupt has been received. If not, the integrator hold circuit remains active at step 4484 . Once the end of frame interrupt is detected, the integrator hold circuit is released at step 4488 .
- FIG. 45 illustrates three separate frame periods. Occurring from times T 0 to T 1 is a first frame 4506 a , from time T 1 to time T 2 is a second frame 4506 b and from time period T 2 to time period T 3 is a third frame 4506 c . During time frame 4506 a , a switch connected to the output of PH X would be turned on by the rising pulse edge 4508 .
- the switch connected with output PH X Upon detection of a pulse indicating a primary interrupt at rising edge 4510 , the switch connected with output PH X would be turned off by the signal being driven low at 4512 by the DPWM 416 . Likewise, in frame 4506 b , the switch associated with DPWM output PH X would be turned on at 4514 and turned off at 4516 responsive to detection of the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ at 4518 . The turning off of a switch in response to detection of the ICYC interrupt occurs similarly in frame 4506 c.
- this signal is provided to the DPWM 416 which then has the option of immediately stopping operation of the DPWM upon receipt of the secondary interrupt OCPIRQ, or alternatively, may wait to cease operation of the DPWM at the end of the next frame. Whether the DPWM ceases operation right away or at the end of the frame is programmable by the user.
- the reset logic 4420 within a previous frame has detected occurrence of a primary interrupt ICYCIRQ, and in the next frame, as indicated by the occurrence of the end of frame interrupt EOFIRQ, there is detected no occurrence of the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ, the reset logic 4420 provides a signal to the reset input of the 5-bit counter 4418 via line 4440 to reset the 5-bit counter to “0.”
- the end of frame interrupt EOFIRQ is additionally provided as an input to the 5-bit counter 4418 . This enables the 5-bit counter to only count a single occurrence of the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ within a particular frame.
- the 5-bit counter 4418 had already counted the occurrence of a primary interrupt ICYCIRQ during a single frame period and receives a second primary interrupt pulse, the counter 4418 will not count this pulse since the counter had not received an end of frame interrupt since receiving the last ICYCIRQ primary interrupt.
- the leading edge blanker circuit 4408 mentioned herein above receives an input from the leading edge blanker select register 4442 .
- the leading edge blanker select register 4442 provides a control input for actuating or not actuating the leading edge blanker circuit 4408 .
- the leading edge blanker select register 4442 also provides an indication to the phase selector 4443 of the phase output of the DPWM 416 that is to be blanked.
- the phase selector 4443 is connected to receive each of the PH 1 -PH 6 outputs of the DPWM 416 , such that the leading edge blanker circuit may know when to actuate a leading edge blanker output via output 4444 to switch 4406 corresponding to a leading edge on one of these phase outputs.
- the leading edge blanker select register 4442 also provides the length of the blanking time of the blanking pulse. Additionally, the leading edge blanker circuit 4408 receives an input from the end of frame interrupt EOFIRQ to indicate when a frame has ended. This enables the leading edge blanker circuit 4408 to know when to begin looking for a next leading edge pulse. Finally, the PWMCK is a clock input clocking operations of the leading edge blanker circuit 4408 . The output of the leading edge blanker circuit 4408 is provided to switch 4406 to provide an open switch condition at switch 4406 to keep the input of the comparator 4402 from seeing a spiked current output on the IPK line. This is more fully illustrated in FIG. 46 .
- FIG. 46 illustrates the output of one of the phase outputs 4602 from the DPWM 416 , the output current IPK 4604 and the blanking signal 4606 .
- the phase output of one of the outputs of the DPWM circuit 416 goes high at 4610 . This comprises the leading edge of this switching pulse.
- a current spike 4612 due to parasitic capacitance is created at the current output IPK. If the voltage related to the current spike 4612 were applied to the input of the comparator 4402 , the comparator 4402 might inadvertently register an over current condition responsive to the current spike even though no over current condition actually existed.
- a blanking pulse is provided from the leading edge blanker circuit 4408 via the output 4444 to the blanking switch 4406 to set the switch to an open condition to keep the comparator 4402 from monitoring the current spike on IPK.
- the current blanking pulse 4614 will only open the blanking switch 4406 during the time of current spike 4612 . The remainder of the time the switch is closed enabling the comparator 4402 to compare the output current to the threshold current.
- the operation of the blanking signal 4606 in the following frame 4616 occurs in a similar fashion.
- the phase blanked by the leading edge blanker circuit 4408 and the length of the blanking pulse 4614 are each programmable by the user through the LEB select register 4442 .
- the blanking circuit 4408 may also detect a falling edge signal that comprises a leading edge signal.
- FIG. 47 there is illustrated a flow diagram describing the operation of the over current protection circuitry in the manner for generating both the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ and the secondary interrupt OCPIRQ.
- the leading edge blanker circuit initially monitors at step 4702 the output current IPK.
- the output current IPK is compared at step 4704 with the threshold current I TH to determine whether the output current exceeds the threshold current. If inquiry step 4706 determines that the output current does not exceed the threshold current, control passes back to monitoring step 4702 .
- a primary interrupt ICYCIRQ is generated at step 4708 .
- Inquiry step 4710 determines if the interrupt is occurring within a new frame. If not, control passes back to monitoring step 4702 to continue to monitor for the occurrence of a primary interrupt in a new frame. If inquiry step 4710 determines that the primary interrupt has occurred within a new frame, the interrupt count is incremented at step 4710 .
- the reset logic 4420 monitors at step 4802 the occurrence of the primary interrupt from the comparator 4402 . If inquiry step 4804 detects an interrupt, control passes back to monitoring step 4802 . If no interrupt is detected, inquiry step 4806 determines if an end of frame interrupt has been received by the reset logic 4420 . If no end of frame interrupt has been received, control passes back to step 4802 to continue monitoring the primary interrupt output. When inquiry step 4806 detects an occurrence of an end of frame interrupt and no primary interrupt has been detected within that frame, the counter 4418 is reset at step 4808 . Control then returns to monitoring step 4802 to repeat the process.
- the 12 bit ADC 4910 is controlled from values from an ADC control register 4912 .
- the output of the 12 bit ADC is a digital output which is applied to the input of a special function register/limit (SFR/LIM) register set.
- SFR/LIM register sets There are a number of SFR/LIM register sets associated with output of the ADC 4910 .
- Each of the SFR/LIM register sets are associated with one of the input analog signals provided to the multiplexor 4902 .
- the SFR/LIM register sets have stored therein a limit value.
- the SFR/LIM register set compares a provided input from the ADC 4910 to this limit value, and if the limit value is exceeded, generates an associated interrupt signal at the output of the SFR/LIM register set.
- a digital VSENSE signal is applied to the input of SFR/LIM register set 4920 .
- the SFR/LIM register set 4920 compares the provided digital value of VSENSE to the predetermined value stored within the register set 4920 . If the provided value exceeds the stored value, a VSENSEIRQ is generated at output 4922 . If the provided value does not exceed the stored limit value in register set 4920 , no VSENSEIRQ is generated. Likewise, if the VIN value is applied to the input of the 12 bit ADC 4910 , the digitized value is applied to the input of SFR/LIM 4924 .
- a AIN 0 /VINRQ is generated at output 4926 .
- the remaining SFR/LIM register sets operate in a similar manner responsive to a digital input that is compared to a limit value stored within the register set. When the limit value is exceeded an appropriate interrupt is generated.
- the digitized temperature signal is applied to the input of the TEMP SFR/LIM register set 4930 . As described previously, this value is compared with a temperature limit value in the register set 4930 , and if this value is exceeded, a TEMPIRQ is generated at output 4932 . However, the output of the TEMP SFR/LIM register set 4930 is connected to the input of an OR gate 4934 . This is due to the fact that not enough interrupt resources are available for each of the SFR/LIM register set, so a limited number of the register sets have their outputs applied to the input of OR gate 4934 .
- OR gate 4934 The interrupt provided to the input of OR gate 4934 is also provided at the output 4936 of OR gate 4934 .
- the TEMP's IRQ is applied to input 4932 , it will also be provided at the output pin 4936 .
- the remaining SFR/LIM register sets are each disabled.
- that register set is the only register set which is presently enabled.
- each of the VSENSE input voltage, the input voltage VIN and the temperature are monitored by the above-described circuitry.
- the interrupt is generated at step 5006 . If inquiry step 5004 determines that no value has been exceeded, control passes back to the monitoring step 5002 . Once the interrupt 5006 has been generated and provided to the controller 440 of the switched power supply, the controller will access at step 5008 the special function register set to determine what the present problem may be.
- the reference phase i.e., an external or internally generated signal
- the reference phase is received on an input 5102 and input to one input of a phase-frequency detector 5104 .
- the output of this is input to a charge pump circuit 5106 which is operable to charge a node from a positive sourcing circuit or to discharge the node to a sinking circuit.
- the output of the charge pump circuit 5106 is input to a loop filter 5108 to generate a control voltage for a voltage controlled oscillator (VCO) 5110 .
- VCO voltage controlled oscillator
- This output is provided as the upper level frequency of, in this example, 400 MHz.
- This is input to one input of a multiplexer 5112 .
- This is then output to a divide-by-two circuit 5114 , which provides on the output a 200 MHz clock, this being the preferred DPWM clock.
- the output of block 5114 is then input to another divide-by-two circuit 5116 to provide a 100 MHz clock signal, which is typically unused, which is then output to a third divide-by-two circuit 5120 , which provides a 50 MHz output and then to a divide-by-two block 5122 to provide on the output thereof a 25 MHz signal for input to the other input of the phase-frequency detector 5104 .
- This PLL provides the 200 MHz clock for the DPWM clock.
- the filter clock is provided by dividing this by a factor of 20.
- test mode there is a test mode provided wherein the input 5102 is input to the other input of a multiplexer 5112 for bypassing the PLL operation in the blocks 5104 - 5110 .
- This allows the dividers to be directly controlled and the frequency of operations to be controlled also.
- FIGS. 52 a - 52 d there is illustrated the manner in which the dead time between two switching control signals may be controlled using the programmability of the pattern generators and a corrected signal u(n) from the trim and limit circuitry.
- FIG. 52 a illustrates a prior art configuration wherein first and second control signals for complementary switches within a power supply are both turned off from a time period between time t 2 and time t 3 . The rising edge at t 3 is determined with respect to the falling edge at t 2 . This time period is referred to as the dead time (DT).
- DT dead time
- this dead time is adjustable only as to controlling a delay between the generation of the trailing edge of ⁇ 1 and the leading edge of ⁇ 2 , but the trailing edge of ⁇ 2 referenced to the beginning of the switching cycle can never occur prior to the trailing edge of ⁇ 1 .
- a microprocessor may program the output of the two phase control outputs to enable the dead time between times t 2 and t 3 to be increased, decreased, or even made negative.
- FIG. 52 b there is illustrated a situation wherein the trailing edge of a first control signal ⁇ 1 is generated responsive to a corrected signal u(n).
- the control signal ⁇ 1 goes low at time t 2 , this occurring when the correct value of the master counter for the DPWM equals u(n) 1 .
- the leading edge of the control signal ⁇ 2 is responsive to the corrected signal C(u(n)) which equals u(n) plus some offset value set by the trim and limit amount.
- control signal ⁇ 2 is programmed responsive to its associated control registers and the corrected u(n) signal such that it will have its leading edge go high when u(n) plus or minus some value x equals the count value of the master DPWM counter at time t 3 .
- the leading edge of control signal ⁇ 2 can be configured to go high five clock cycles after the ⁇ 1 signals goes low at t 2 .
- the advantage of the DPWM controller described with respect to FIGS. 34-37 is that it enables the point at which the leading edge of control signal ⁇ 2 goes high at time t 3 , and thus the dead time to be programmably adjusted independently of the trailing edge of control signal ⁇ 1 .
- the value of x may comprise any positive or negative value adjusted by the offset adders in the trim and limit circuitry. If the value x comprises a negative value, the situation as illustrated in FIG. 52 c occurs. In this case, the first control signal ⁇ 1 is a function of u(n) as before with the trailing edge going low at time t 3 .
- the dead time between the trailing edge of control signal ⁇ i and the leading edge of control signal ⁇ 2 is negative such that the leading edge of control signal 2 goes high at time t 2 before the trailing edge of control signal ⁇ 1 goes low at time t 3 .
- the ability of the leading edge of control signal ⁇ 2 to go high at a time prior to traling edge of control signal ⁇ 1 going low is not available within previous analog or digital systems. In previous analog or digital systems the control of the leading edge control signal ⁇ 2 was always responsive to the trailing edge of control signal ⁇ 1 occurring at time t 3 .
- control signals ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 are programmed independently of each other with separate and individual finite state machines, the leading edge of control signal ⁇ 2 may go high at any point in time. This is useful in situations wherein complementary switches of a switched power supply have different switching times associated therewith, and the switch associated with signal ⁇ 2 takes longer to reach its steady state operating condition.
- a second control signal ⁇ 2 may have its leading edge independently programmed from the trailing edge of the first control signal ⁇ 1 such that the dead time between the trailing edge of control signal ⁇ 1 and the leading edge of control signal ⁇ 2 may be adjusted in a positive direction from t 3 to t 4 or in a negative direction from time t 3 to time t 2 and referenced to the beginning of the switching cycle, or to any other edge in the system other than the trailing edge of ⁇ 1 , the edge relating to the dead time requirement.
- the primary side of the switched power supply includes a DC supply 5302 connected between node 5304 and ground.
- a pair of switching transistors 5306 and 5308 are connected between node 5304 and ground.
- the drain/source path of transistor 5306 is connected between node 5304 and node 5310 .
- the gate of transistor 5306 is connected to the PH 1 control output.
- Transistor 5308 has its drain/source path connected between node 5310 and ground.
- the gate of transistor 5308 is connected to the PH 2 control output.
- the body diodes 5312 and 5314 are connected across each of the transistors 5306 and 5308 respectively.
- a capacitor 5316 is connected between node 5304 and node 5318 .
- Another capacitor 5320 is connected between node 5318 and ground.
- a third switching transistor 5322 has its source/drain path connected between node 5318 and the annode of diode 5324 .
- the gate of transistor 5322 is connected to the PH 3 control output.
- the cathode of diode 5324 is connected to node 5310 .
- Inductor 5326 is connected between node 5318 and one input of the primary side of power transformer 5328 .
- the second input of the primary side of power transformer 5328 is connected to node 5310 .
- the secondary side of power transformer 3328 is connected between nodes 5330 and 5332 .
- a first inductor 5334 is connected between node 5330 and node 5336 .
- a second inductor 5338 is connected between node 5336 and node 5332 .
- a capacitor 5340 is connected inparallel with a resistor 5342 between node 5336 and node 5344 .
- a fourth switching transistor 5346 has its source/drain path connected between node 5344 and node 5330 . The gate of transistor 5346 is connected to the PH 4 control output.
- a fifth switching transistor 5348 has its source/drain path connected between node 5344 and node 5332 . The gate of transistor 5348 is connected to the PH 5 control output.
- FIG. 54 there is illustrated a timing diagram for the phase control signals applied to each of the switching transistors of the switched power supply illustrated in FIG. 53 by way of example.
- the control signal PH 1 has a leading edge occurring at time t 1 and a trailing edge occurring at time t 3 .
- the distance between the leading edge of time t 1 and the trailing edge at time t 3 is a function of the u(n) value determined by the filter and the trailing edge occurs when the count value between the leading and trailing edges is equal to u(n).
- the leading edge of the PH 1 control output at the time t 1 is an absolute edge occurring at a defined count value of the master DPWM clock from the beginning of the switching cycle.
- the control signal PH 2 has a leading edge occurring at time t 4 which is relative distance from the falling edge of signal PH 1 at time t 2 of a predetermined number of clock cycles of the master clock.
- the trailing edge of the PH 2 control signal occurs at time t 6 , and is a function of the u(n) signal.
- the leading edge of the PH 3 control output occurs at time t 5 , and is a relative edge to the leading edge of the PH 2 control output occurring at t 4 .
- the trailing edge of the PH 3 control signal occurs at time t 8 , and is an absolute edge always occurring at the same defined point in a frame, i.e., at the end of the switching cycle.
- the leading edge of the PH 4 output is an absolute edge occurring at time to in a frame, i.e., the beginning of the switching cycle with an absolute value of “0”.
- the trailing edge of the PH 4 output occurs at time t 3 , and has a dead time period from the trailing edge of PH 1 occurring at time t 2 .
- the dead time is established by generating the trailing edge of the PH 4 control output at time t 3 and dependent upon the value of u(n) plus some defined offset value.
- a set dead time may be established, since the PH 4 output edges and PH 1 output edges are both dependent on u(n). Since both are dependent on u(n), the edges may be generated independently with a defined positive or negative offset.
- a dead time period between the leading edge of the PH 2 control output and the trailing edge of the PH 5 output occurring at time t 7 is established by generating the trailing edge at time t 7 in such a manner that it is dependent upon the u(n) signal plus some offset value, but referenced to the PH 2 control output rising edge.
- the trailing edge of the PH 5 control output at t 7 will always be different from the falling edge of the PH 2 output by the established offset since both signals are generated based upon u(n) and both are a fixed number of clock cycles delayed from the trailing edge of PH 1 .
- a programmable dead time may be established between various phase output control signals.
- the trailing edge of PH 5 is based on the leading edge of PH 2 as a reference edge that sets a reference count value and then the value of u(n) +/ ⁇ an offset is added thereto such that, when the master counter equals the is equal to PH 2 LE +u(n) +/ ⁇ offset, then the trailing edge of PH 5 will be generated.
- step 5500 the desired dead time to occur between the first and second phase output control signals is determined.
- the requirements for a pair of corrected values of u(n) are established within the trim and limit circuitry in the manner described previously with respect to FIGS. 36 a and 36 b .
- a desired positive or negative offset may be applied at step 5502 to one u(n) signal to establish the dead time period for a corrected u(n) signal.
- a second corrected u(n) signal is established without the offset.
- the minimum and maximum ranges are established at step 5503 for each corrected u(n) signal in accordance with the low limit registers and the high limit registers as described with respect to FIGS. 36 a and 36 b .
- the trim and limit circuitry provides a number of corrected values of u(n), and the desired corrected values of u(n) are selected at step 5504 .
- the pattern generator for a first phase output and either the leading or trailing edge is programmed at step 5506 to generate the control phase output edge in a desired manner.
- the control values are used along with the value of u(n) to create a leading edge and a trailing edge at desired locations in a frame, each potentially independent of the other. This process is more fully described with respect to FIGS. 34-37 .
- a pattern generator for the second phase output signal is programmed at step 5510 using a second corrected value of u(n) having the necessary offset included therein and the necessary control values within the control register for the leading and trailing edges of the second phase output.
- the control values for the trim and limit circuit and the control registers are provided by the controlling microprocessor. Once the desired control values are set within the control registers for the first phase output and the second phase output, the leading and trailing edges for the first and second phase outputs are each independently generated at step 5512 using the programmed pattern generators and the corrected value of u(n). This will provide the first and second control signals having a dead time between the control signals programmed to a desired value.
- each phase output is comprised of a leading edge and trailing edge, this leading edge being either rising or falling and the trailing edge either falling or rising, respectively.
- the embodiment of FIG. 56 is for a single edge in a single phase, wherein the embodiment of FIG. 37 illustrates the generation of both the leading and trailing edge for a given phase output.
- the leading edge operation and the trailing edge operation are logically OR'ed together to provide an output phase control signal for a given switching device.
- each edge for each phase control output is generated utilizing a finite state machine (FSM).
- FSM finite state machine
- This finite state machine is noted with a reference numeral 5602 .
- There is provided an operand value from a multiplexer 5604 that being similar to multiplexers 3702 and 3710 , these being the primary edge control.
- the operand is selected to either be the number of counts associated with the duty cycle, u(n), the fixed value of counts representing an absolute value or a fixed number of counts representing relative value.
- the absolute and relative counts are derived from the registers PHn_CNTL 1 / 3 , as set forth in FIG. 37 . These are 9-bit values.
- the u(n) value is the value that is determined at the control loop and represents the number of counts for the width of PH 1 . This is effectively the number of counts that PH 1 is active high and allows current to be passed to the inductive element.
- the duty cycle is equal to u(n) divided by the total count for a given frame, which total count for a given flame represents the length of the switching cycle in counts of a master counter. The master count is initiated upon the initiation of a particular switching cycle and it is incremented by the master clock. This switching cycle has a fixed number of counts.
- the value of u(n) determined through the loop controller and output by the PBD can be corrected by the trim and limit circuitry to provide a positive or negative offset. Therefore, the uncorrected u(n) is input to one of multiple trim and limit circuits 5606 , one potentially for each edge, such that if there are “x” phases, there could potentially be “2x” trim and limit circuits. In the circuit illustrated in FIG. 34 , there are only four trim and limit circuits provided, it being understood that more could be utilized. Thus, each edge can independently be determined utilizing a value of u(n) that is either increased by a positive offset or decreased in value by a predetermined negative offset without reference to the generation of other edges by the finite state machines associated with the other edges.
- the finite state machine 5602 selects the output C(u(n)) one of these trim and limit circuits 5606 for use therewith by a multiplexer 5608 , it being understood that each trim and limit circuit 5606 can have a different and programmable offset associated therewith. This provides the corrected value C(u(n)).
- the multiplexer 5604 selects this input if the edge associated therewith is to be based upon this potentially corrected value.
- the other input that is provided, as set forth with respect to the multiplexers 3706 and 3712 of FIG. 37 is the selection of an edge control from another phase generator, i.e., the generation of another edge in the system. This is provided by a multiplexer 5610 and provides the frame of reference for the associated edge.
- finite state machine 5602 is operable to generate an edge based upon an absolute value of counts from the initiation of the switching cycle, a fixed number of counts relative to another edge in the system, this being a relative value, or a number of counts based upon the u(n) value.
- the edge generation is either absolute, relative or u(n).
- This u(n) value based decision when selected, determines a count value from either the beginning of the switching cycle or another edge generated in the system.
- an adder 5612 Inside the finite state machine 5602 , there is provided an adder 5612 .
- the adder 5612 is operable to add the value of the operand, which constitutes a count value with the value of the selected phase from the multiplexer 5610 or an external beginning of switching frame signal referred to as FSYNCH. This is facilitated with a multiplexer 5614 . Therefore, the actual reference is provided out of the multiplexer 5614 from which the operand is to count. This reference represents a count value within the switching frame for either the occurrence of one of the edges in one of the phases or an external pulse, which represents the “0” count of the master counter represented by block 5618 . Therefore, the adder will provide on the output thereof the desired count value.
- a comparator 5620 This is compared in a comparator 5620 to the count value of the master counter which, as described hereinabove, is reset at a value of “0” at the beginning of a switching cycle.
- this count value output by the multiplexer 5604 basically provides an additional count to that already provided by the output of multiplexer 5610 such that this output of the multiplexer 5610 provides a reference or “normalized” count value.
- the output of the comparator 5620 will go high representing the generation of an edge. This is input to a set/reset latch 5622 which is associated with each phase control signal, PHx. This provides the appropriate edge on the output.
- This latch 5622 is controlled such that it is biased one direction or the other, i.e., it will be a rising edge or a falling edge on the output thereof. This merely requires inverting the value thereof. This is provided by one of the control signals in the register such that the leading edge will either be a high going edge or a low going edge.
- the finite state machine 5602 represents the “leading” edge of the particular phase control output.
- the other edge, the trailing edge, of the phase control output is provided through a substantially identical finite state machine 5624 which is connected to the reset input of the latch 5622 .
- each edge is independently generated and then combined with the latch 5622 in order to provide a “state change” from an initial state to a second state with a leading edge and then back to the initial state with a trailing edge.
- Each of the finite state machines 5602 and 5624 associated with the associated phase control signal operate independently and are each programmable such that the output of the multiplexer 5604 associated with finite state machine 5602 and the corresponding multiplexer associated with finite state machine 5624 can independently select the type of edge that is generated and the multiplexer 5610 and corresponding multiplexer in the finite state machine 5624 can select the reference edge or count of the master counter from which the count is calculated.
- Each of the finite state machines 5602 and 5624 have a self contained adder 5612 and comparator 5620 for determining when the edge is to be generated. All the finite state machines for each of the phase control signals operate off of the master counter 5618 .
- FIGS. 57 a - 57 b there are illustrated diagrams for each of the edge generation decisions for respective edge generated.
- FIG. 57 a illustrates the generation of an edge based upon either Absolute value or a u(n) value.
- This wave form requires generation of both a leading and a trailing edge for PH 1 .
- the trailing edge is the next edge that has to be generated. It should be understood that this edge is generated independently of the leading edge 5702 .
- the trailing edge is indicated by a reference numeral of 5704 .
- This edge is a function of u(n). It is generated from the absolute edge 5702 or from the beginning of the switching cycle if the absolute value of the leading edge is “0.” Thus, the number of counts represented by the output of the loop filter for u(n) determines when the edge 5704 will be generated. In general, the value of u(n) is a varying value output by the filter.
- this value can vary from the beginning of the switching cycle to the generation of the edge 5704 .
- the finite state machine 5602 that is associated with the trailing edge 5704 will determine when the edge 5704 will be generated. This is facilitated by comparing a count value of the master DPWM counter with the desired count value at the output of the adder 5612 , which is representative of a normalized count value at the edge 5702 , and, when it equals u(n), the edge 5704 is generated.
- the pulse generated has a rising edge 5706 that is the trigger edge, this also being the leading edge.
- This is generated, in this illustration, by an independent finite state machine that generates edge 5706 at a count value of u(n) from the start of the switching cycle.
- an edge 5708 the trailing edge associated with leading edge 5706 , is generated a fixed number of cycles after leading edge 5706 .
- this edge 5708 it is only necessary to store the relative value and the edge to which it is referenced, this edge being any edge in the system.
- FIG. 57 c there is illustrated an edge generated utilizing the value of u(n) but generating this relative to another edge. Further, this is generated not only with the value of u(n), but also a corrected value, by adding or subtracting an offset therefrom.
- the reference edge is noted as being a leading edge 5710 on the same pulse (but could be from another phase control signal).
- a trailing edge 5712 is generated by adding or subtracting an offset with a trim and limit circuit from the value of the u(n) measured relative to the edge 5710 . Therefore, the width of this particular pulse is the C(u(n)) generated by the trim and limit circuit.
- the offset is determined by the contents of the offset register and then only modifies the value of u(n).
- the edge 5712 is generated.
- FIG. 57 d there is illustrated a diagram showing an edge generated based upon u(n) +/ ⁇ offset and based upon the start of the switching cycle as the reference edge.
- This is a single edge, the leading edge, 5714 . It should be noted that this edge can be utilized for the dead time determination due to the fact that it is generated based upon a reference edge to which another pulse is initially referenced to when generated. This will be described hereinbelow.
- FIGS. 58 a and 58 b there is illustrated a diagrammatic view of how the dead time is determined utilizing the embodiment of FIG. 57 d .
- the initial phase, PH 1 is generated by generating a leading edge 5802 from the beginning of the switching cycle by a distance equal to the value in the Absolute register, it being noted that this could be “0.”
- the trailing edge, an edge 5806 is generated after the normalized count value from the edge 5802 has been determined to equal u(n). This was noted hereinabove.
- a second pulse generates a leading edge 5708 a predetermined amount of time from the edge 5806 .
- the edge 5708 is required to be generated prior to edge 5806 .
- the edge 5708 is generated not based upon the edge 5806 but based upon a corrected u(n) value reference to the edge 5802 , i.e., the same as was the case for the edge 5806 .
- the edge 5708 is generated from another reference than that to which it is actually desirable to be relative to.
- both are relative to the same reference edge, they are essentially related edges. However, in certain situations, as noted herein above, it may be desirable that the edge 5708 occurs before the edge 5806 . If this is the case, it is difficult to do that in an analog situation wherein one edge is generated from another, i.e., they are pipelined. With the offset actually being a negative value such that the corrected value of u(n) can be less than u(n), then this edge 5708 can be generated prior to the edge 5806 . This is illustrated in FIG. 58 b wherein the edge 5708 ′ is generated prior to the edge 5806 .
- FIG. 59 there is illustrated a flow chart depicting the generation of a Relative edge. This is initiated at a block 5902 and then proceeds to decision block 5904 to determine if a reference edge has been generated to which the relative edge is related. When this occurs, the program will flow to a function block 5906 to fetch the contents of a relative edge, this, as noted hereinabove, being a 9-bit fixed value. The program then flows to a function block 5908 to normalize the count value. (Note that this is just to provide a frame of reference). As noted herein above, the master counter is initiated at the beginning of the switching cycle. The count value is normalized at the reference edge, such that this now becomes the virtual “0” count value.
- the program then flows to a decision block 5910 to determine if the normalized count, i.e., that from the reference edge, is equal to the value of the Relative register. When this occurs, the program flows to a function block 5912 to generate the edge and then to an End block 5914 .
- the program then flows to a decision block 6004 to determine if the master DPWM counter value associated with the start of the switching cycle has occurred.
- the master DPWM counter is reset at the beginning of the switching cycle.
- the Absolute operational mode is a mode wherein the count value is measured from the edge of the initiation of the switching cycle.
- the program will flow along a “Y” path to a function block 6006 to fetch the contents of the Absolute register.
- the program then flows to a function block 6008 to determine if the count value, this not being a normalized count, is equal to a register value. When this occurs, the program flows to a function block 6010 to generate the edge and then to an End block 6012 .
- FIG. 61 there is illustrated a flowchart depicting the operation of generating a u(n) related edge, which is initiated at a block 6102 and then proceeds to a decision block 6104 .
- Decision block 6104 determines when a reference edge occurs, it being noted that the u(n) based edge can be generated based upon a reference edge generated by another finite state machine, it can be generated based upon the initiation of the switching cycle, or it can be generated from another edge in the same phase control output for that associated PHx. As noted hereinabove, each edge is generated independently, such that each other edge in the system constitutes a potential reference edge.
- the program flows along the “Y” path to the function block 6116 from the decision block 6106 to select the offset stored in the register. This if facilitated by both selecting one of the trim and limit circuits with the multiplexer 5608 and then fetching the contents of the offset register therefrom.
- the program then flows to a function block 6118 to generate the corrected value of u(n) and then to a function block 6120 to normalize the counter at the reference edge.
- the program then flows to a decision block 6122 in order to determine if the normalized count measured from the reference edge is equal to the corrected value of u(n). When this occurs, the program flows to the function block 6112 in order to generate the edge.
- this is a finite state machine, it takes a very small number of cycles in order to execute the operation. In general, it basically takes one cycle to determine the value and then another clock cycle in order to clock this through to the output, which is typically what is required for a gated operation.
- FIG. 62 there is illustrated a diagrammatic view of a dead time optimization system.
- This is a multi-phase system, as described hereinabove.
- six different switches have been provided and interfaced with an inductive element 6202 that drives the capacitive element 6204 .
- a first switch, the primary switch, driven by a phase ⁇ 1 connects the input voltage to the top side of the inductor 6202 , with a second switch 6208 driven by phase ⁇ 2 .
- a second set of complimentary switches is provided by a switch 6205 connected between the input and the top level of capacitors 6204 with a switch and driven by phase ⁇ and a switch 6210 connected to ground and driven by phase ⁇ 4 .
- a third set of complimentary switches is provided by a switch 6206 driven by ⁇ 5 connected between the input voltage and the top capacitor 6204 with a switch 6212 connecting the top layer of the capacitor to ground with a phase ⁇ 6 .
- These switches and their configurations are for exemplary purposes only to show three sets of complimentary switches.
- An example of a multi-phase system is illustrated in FIG. 53 .
- the current input to the switch 6204 is sensed with a current sense circuit 6226 , which is a Hall sensor.
- a digital controller block 6228 which represents the overall digital control loop that generates the six different phases.
- This is controlled in part by a start-up block 6230 which is basically operable to initiate the dead time optimization routine whenever a power-up condition exists, a re-start-up condition exists or even a manual input is received for such dead time optimization. Any other reason for initiating a dead time optimization routine will be represented by the block 6230 . This is typically facilitated with the microcontroller.
- a dead time register 6232 is provided for storing the dead time value. It is noted that the user can initially set a dead time value for the purpose of configuring the overall power supply.
- FIG. 63 there is illustrated a plot of dead time versus current wherein it can be seen that, as the dead time decreases, the current will increase, resulting from the one complimentary switch connected to ground shunning current. Further, as the dead time increases, current will also increase due to inefficiencies. There will be a minimum current versus dead time that will occur, which is desirable from the optimization routine. This is the desirable operating mode.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Dc-Dc Converters (AREA)
- Analogue/Digital Conversion (AREA)
Abstract
A method is disclosed for optimizing the efficiency of a digital switched power supply having a plurality of switches responsive to generated pulse control signals. The process involves varying the initiation of conduction in at least one of the switches relative to the conduction in another of the switches by controlling when an edge in an associated one of the pulse control signals is generated. The current to the power supply is measured during the step of varying and a minima in the measured current determined over the step of varying. After the step of determining, the configuration of the respective pulse control signals at the minima is frozen.
Description
- This is a Continuation-in-part application of U.S. Ser. No. 11/096,597, filed on Mar. 31, 2005, entitled “DIGITAL PWM CONTROLLER” (Atty. Dkt. CYGL 27,074) and it is related to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/096,598, filed Mar. 31, 2005, and entitled “PID BASED CONTROLLER FOR DC-DC CONVERTER WITH POST-PROCESSING FILTERS” (Atty. Dkt. CYGL 27,105) and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/096,853, filed Mar. 31,2005, and entitled “DIGITAL POWER SUPPLY CONTROLLER WITH VOLTAGE POSITIONING” (Atty. Dkt. No. CYGL-27,111), and U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, filed Jun. 30, 2005, and entitled “DIGITAL PWM CONTROLLER FOR DIGITAL POWER SUPPLY HAVING PROGRAMMABLE DEAD TIMES” (Atty. Dkt. No. CYGL-27,161), each of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety and claims priority in Provisional Application No. 60/591,463, filed Jul. 27, 2004, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- The present invention pertains in general to DC-DC power converters and, more particularly, to a digital controller for a DC-DC power converter having a programmable dead time.
- DC-DC power converters are utilized in situations where one DC voltage is converted to another DC voltage. In one application, that associated with PC based systems, the processor requires a fairly low voltage and a fairly high current. Rather than convert an incoming AC voltage down to a very low DC voltage and then route the low DC voltage across a PC board, a higher DC voltage is output by the power supply, routed around to the various components on the PC board and then, proximate to the processor, the voltage is down converted to a very low level on the order of 1.0 V. This requires a conversion device to be disposed proximate to one or more high current integrated circuits on the board.
- Typical DC-DC converters are fabricated using a switching supply that utilizes a switched inductor or capacitor configuration with the input DC voltage switched to the input thereof with a periodically waveform operating at a preset switching frequency with a varying duty cycle. By sensing the output voltage and comparing it with a desired voltage, the duty cycle of the waveform can be adjusted to control the amount of current supplied to the reactive components. This control is facilitated with a negative feedback control loop.
- There are two types of feedback loops, an analog feedback loop and a digital feedback loop. The analog feedback loop is well understood and provides some advantages over the other type of feedback loop, the digital feedback loop. Each of the feedback loops has associated therewith a voltage sense input for sensing the supply output voltage and a pulse width modulator (PWM) for generating switching pulses for driving switches. The sensed voltage is compared in the analog domain to a desired operating DC voltage to generate an error voltage that is reduced to essentially zero volts at regulation. To compensate for loop phase shift, there is provided a compensator. This provides some phase lead in the feedback loop for the purpose of loop stability. The digital controller portion of the digital feedback loop is similar to the analog feedback loop. The voltage signal sense input utilizes an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) to convert the output voltage to a digital value and then compare this to a desired voltage to determine the difference voltage as an error voltage. A digital compensator then provides some phase lead to the feedback to maintain stability in the control loop. This digital error voltage is then converted into a varying pulse width for output to the driving switches on the switching converter. This in effect is a digital-to-analog converter. Typical switching converters such as buck converters can utilize single or multiple phases to facilitate the switching operation.
- Analog controllers do not have the ability to independently control the dead time for control signals for complementary switchers. For analog controllers the rising edge of a second control signal is based upon a falling edge of a first control signal. Thus, the second control signal is completely dependent on the falling edge of the first control signal. Some manner for independently controlling a rising edge of a second control signal with respect to a falling edge of the first control signal would provide much greater control of the operation of the switched power supply. The dead time determination has a direct bearing on the efficiency of operation of the power supply. From that standpoint, it is important to ensure that complimentary switches operate with a minimum of dead time so as to reduce input current.
- The present invention disclosed and claimed herein, in one aspect thereof, comprises a method for optimizing the efficiency of a digital switched power supply having a plurality of switches responsive to generated pulse control signals. The process involves varying the initiation of conduction in at least one of the switches relative to the conduction in another of the switches by controlling when an edge in an associated one of the pulse control signals is generated. The current to the power supply is measured during the step of varying and a minima in the measured current determined over the step of varying. After the step of determining, the configuration of the respective pulse control signals at the minima is frozen.
- For a more complete understanding of the present invention and the advantages thereof, reference is now made to the following description taken in conjunction with the accompanying Drawings in which:
-
FIG. 1 illustrates an overall block diagram of a switching power supply; -
FIG. 2 illustrates a schematic diagram of the switching portion of a half-bridge power supply; -
FIG. 3 illustrates the timing diagram for the control pulses to the switching power supply; -
FIG. 4 illustrates a diagrammatic view of the digital controller utilized in conjunction with a buck converter; -
FIG. 5 illustrates a more detailed view of the digital controller; -
FIGS. 6 a-6 b illustrates a block diagram of the microcontroller portion of the digital controller; -
FIG. 6 c illustrates a diagrammatic view of a monolithic solution utilizing the embodiments ofFIGS. 4, 5 and 6; -
FIG. 7 illustrates an overall block diagram of the Flash ADC; -
FIG. 8 illustrates a prior art Flash ADC; -
FIG. 9 illustrates a more detailed diagram of the comparator portion of the Flash ADC of the present disclosure; -
FIGS. 10 and 10 a illustrate a block diagram of a comparator string; -
FIG. 11 illustrates a timing diagram for the operation of the compare operation; -
FIG. 12 illustrates a schematic diagram of the bias circuitry for the resistor ladder; -
FIG. 13 illustrates a schematic diagram for the first comparator section; -
FIG. 14 illustrates a schematic diagram for the second comparator section; -
FIG. 15 illustrates a schematic diagram for the reconfigurable latch; -
FIG. 16 illustrates a gain response curve for the reconfigurable latch; -
FIG. 17 illustrates a schematic diagram for the dynamic latch; -
FIG. 18 illustrates a simplified block diagram of the PID; -
FIG. 19 illustrates a more detailed block diagram of the PID; -
FIGS. 20 a and 20 b illustrate a z-domain plot of amplitude and phase; -
FIG. 21 illustrates a frequency plot of a low pass filter; -
FIG. 22 illustrates a frequency response of the sinc filter; -
FIG. 23 illustrates a block diagram of one implementation of the PID; -
FIG. 24 illustrates a Bode plot of the overall digital compensator comprised of the PID and LPF; -
FIG. 25 illustrates a more detailed waveform of the sinc filter; -
FIG. 26 illustrates a plot of the voltage response in a prior art system to positive and negative transients; -
FIGS. 27 a and 27 b illustrate voltage plots for transients in the presence of voltage positioning for both low and high current, respectively; -
FIGS. 28 a and 28 b illustrate the relationship between the voltage set point and the current level; -
FIG. 29 illustrates a flow chart depicting the operation of voltage positioning; -
FIG. 30 illustrates a block diagram of the voltage positioning in the current sensing operation utilizing two current sensors; -
FIG. 31 illustrates a schematic diagram of the circuitry for determining the inductor current; -
FIG. 32 illustrates a schematic diagram of the method for determining the capacitor current; -
FIG. 33 illustrates a diagrammatic view of the method for measuring the total load current without Hall sensors; -
FIG. 34 illustrates a diagrammatic view of the DPWM; -
FIG. 35 illustrates a more detailed diagrammatic view of the DPWM; -
FIG. 36 illustrates a block diagram of the trim and limit sub-system; -
FIG. 37 illustrates a block diagram of the DPWM timing register program model; -
FIG. 38 illustrates a block diagram of the shut-down sources; -
FIG. 39 illustrates a timing diagram for the sync operation; -
FIG. 40 illustrates a timing diagram for the frame skipping operation; -
FIG. 41 illustrates a simplified block diagram of the bypass logic; -
FIG. 42 illustrates a flow chart for the operation of the pattern generator for creation of the edges of the various phases; -
FIG. 43 illustrates a flow chart for the operation of the u(n) selection; -
FIG. 44 a is a functional block diagram of over current protection circuitry; -
FIG. 44 b illustrates an integrator hold circuit responsive to the primary interrupt; -
FIG. 44 c is a flow diagram illustrating the operation of the integrator hold circuit ofFIG. 44 b; -
FIG. 45 is a timing diagram illustrating the operation of a phase output of the digital pulse width modulator responsive to an over current detection signal; -
FIG. 46 is a timing diagram illustrating the use of a blanking pulse; -
FIG. 47 is a flow diagram illustrating the generation of primary and secondary interrupts by the over current protection circuitry; -
FIG. 48 is a flow diagram illustrating the operation of the reset circuitry of the over current protection circuitry; -
FIG. 49 is a functional block diagram illustrating the circuitry for providing over voltage and over temperature protections for a digital pulse with modulator; -
FIG. 50 is a flow diagram illustrating the method for providing over voltage and over temperature protections; -
FIG. 51 illustrates a diagrammatic view of the PLL; -
FIGS. 52 a-d are timing diagrams illustrating a programmable dead time for complementary switches; -
FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram of a multi-phase switched power circuit; -
FIG. 54 is a timing diagram for the phase inputs to each of the switching transistors of the circuit inFIG. 53 ; -
FIG. 55 is a flow diagram illustrating the method for establishing a dead time between to phase outputs; -
FIG. 56 illustrates a more detailed block diagram of one pattern generator for a single phase illustrating the operation of the associated finite state machine for a given edge of a particular phase output, either the leading or the trailing edge; -
FIGS. 57 a-57 d illustrate timing diagrams for the various methodologies for generating an edge; -
FIGS. 58 a and 58 b illustrate the generation of a relative edge associated with dead time between two edges; -
FIG. 59 illustrates a flow chart depicting the operation of the generating a relative edge; -
FIG. 60 illustrates a flow chart depicting the operation of generating an absolute edge; -
FIG. 61 illustrates a flow chart depicting the operation of generating the u(n) edge; -
FIG. 62 illustrates a diagrammatic view of a multi-phase system for determining dead time; -
FIG. 63 shows a plot of dead time versus input current; and -
FIG. 64 illustrates a flow chart for optimizing the dead time value. - Referring now to
FIG. 1 , there is illustrated a top level schematic diagram for the switching power supply of the present embodiment, which in this FIG. is illustrated as a half bridge power supply. The main portion of the power supply comprises aprimary switch group 102 that is operable to receive an input voltage on anode 104, this being a DC voltage, and ground on anode 106. Theprimary switch group 102 is coupled through anisolation transformer 108 to asecondary switch group 110. Thesecondary switch group 110 is operable to drive anoutput voltage node 112 that is connected to one terminal of aload 114, thesecondary switch group 110 also having a ground connection on anode 116, theload 114 disposed between thenode 112 and thenode 116. The twoswitch groups control bus 118 associated with theprimary switch group 102 and with various pulse inputs on acontrol bus 126 associated with thesecondary switch group 110. - A
digital control circuit 124 is provided which is operable to control the operation of theprimary switch group 102 and thesecondary switch group 110. Thenodes digital control circuit 124 for sensing the voltage and current on the primary, thedigital control circuit 124 generating the information on thebus 118 for control of theprimary switch group 102. Thecontrol circuit 124 must be isolated from thesecondary switch group 110. This is facilitated by driving abus 126 through anisolation circuit 128, such as an opto-isolator, to drive thebus 120. Similarly, thecontrol circuit 124 is operable to sense the voltage and current levels on theoutput node 112 throughsense lines 130 which are also connected through anisolation circuit 132 to thedigital control circuit 124. Thedigital control circuit 124 is also interfaced to abus 136 to receive external control/configuration information. This can be facilitated with a serial data bus such as an SMB serial data bus. - Referring now to
FIG. 2 , there is illustrated a detailed schematic diagram of theprimary switch group 102,isolation transformer 108 andsecondary switch group 110. Thenode 104 is connected to one side of the source-drain path of apower switching transistor 202, the other side thereof connected to anode 204.Node 204 is connected to one side of the primary ofisolation transformer 108, a primary 206. The other side of primary 206 is connected to anode 208.Node 208 is coupled tonode 104 through acapacitor 210.Node 106 is coupled to one side of the source-drain path of a switchingtransistor 212, the other side thereof connected tonode 204.Node 208 is coupled through acapacitor 214 tonode 106. Adiode 218 has the anode thereof connected tonode 208 and the cathode thereof connected to anode 220,node 220 connected to one side of the source-drain path of a switchingtransistor 222, the other side thereof connected tonode 204. -
Switching transistor 212 is controlled by a switching pulse P1, the gate of switchingtransistor 202 controlled by a switching pulse P2 and the gate of switchingtransistor 222 controlled by switching pulse P3. Switching pulses P1, P2 and P3 all form part of thebus 118. - The
secondary switch group 110 is comprised of a switchingtransistor 230 having the source-drain path thereof connected between thenode 116 and anode 232, the gate thereof controlled by a switching pulse P5.Node 232 is connected to one side of a winding 234 which forms part of the secondary of theisolation transformer 108. The other side of winding 234 is connected to acenter tap node 236,node 236 connected to one side of a winding 238, the other side thereof connected to anode 240. Winding 238 and winding 234 form the secondary oftransformer 108. -
Node 240 is connected to one side of the source-drain path of a switchingtransistor 242, the other side thereof connected tonode 116 and the gate thereof connected to a switching pulse P4. Aninductor 244 is connected betweennode 236 and theoutput node 112. Theoutput node 112 is coupled to theground node 116 through acapacitor 246 which is connected proximate to the other side of the source-drain path oftransistor 230 and coupled through acapacitor 248 tonode 116 proximate to the other side of the source-drain path of switchingtransistor 242. - Referring now to
FIG. 3 , there is illustrated a timing diagram for generating the switching pulses to operate the switch ofFIG. 2 . The switching pulse P1 is a pulse-width modulated switching pulse having a risingedge 320. The risingedge 320 changes the level to ahigh level 322 which then returns to the low level at a fallingedge 324. The switching pulse P2 is delayed from the fallingedge 324 by a delay td1. The risingedge 326 changes the level of switching pulse P2 to ahigh level 328 followed by a change back to a low level having a fallingedge 330. The switching pulse P3 goes from a low level to a high level ahead of the falling edge of P2 by delay time td2. The switching pulse P3 returns to the low level at a fallingedge 336. - In the output switch, the switching pulse P4 goes from a low level to a
high level 336 at a risingedge 338. The risingedge 338 is delayed from the risingedge 320 by a delay time td3. The switching pulse P4 returns to a low level ahead of the falling edge of P1 by delay time td3. The switching pulse P5 goes from a low level to ahigh level 342 at a risingedge 344 which is delayed fromedge 326 of switching pulse P2 by a delay td3. Switching pulse P5 returns to a low level ahead of the rising edge of P3 by delay td3. - It can be seen that the
switches FIG. 2 are controlled by switching pulses P1 and P2. The delay td1 is the duration of time required fortransistor 212 to go from a conducting state to a non-conducting state and prior totransistor 202 going to a conducting state. The delay td1 is a delay that is required in order to ensure that the switches are completely off such that connecting thenode 204 to theground node 106 does not cause current to flow throughtransistor 202. This could result in a “shoot-through” current spike. Depending upon the circuit components and operating frequency, it may be necessary to vary this delay. Similarly,transistor 222 will be turned on prior to turning offswitch 202 with the delay td2 allowing thediode 218 to be placed in parallel with the primary 206 prior to turning offtransistor 202. Similarly, on the output switch, it is necessary thattransistor 242 is maintained in a non-conducting state untiltransistor 212 is fully turned on andnode 204 is sufficiently grounded. Further, it is necessary that the fallingedge 346 be delayed until thetransistor 222 has fully turned on, which requires the delay td3. This timing is conventional and, depending upon the application, the various delays will be adjusted, these adjustments due to the size of the load, circuit characteristics and operating frequency. - Digital Controller—Overall
- Referring now to
FIG. 4 , there is illustrated a block diagram of thedigital controller 124 ofFIG. 1 . As described hereinabove, the switching converter is generally realized with a half bridge converter, but asimpler buck converter 402 is illustrated in this figure. This requires a plurality ofphases 404 for controlling the switches internal to thebuck converter 402. This will allow a DC input voltage to be converted to a DC output voltage onoutput 406. The digital controller senses the output voltage on theoutput 406 as a sense voltage, VSENSE, and inputs this to one input of a differential analog-to-digital converter (ADC) 408. The other input of theADC 408 is connected to an analog or reference voltage generated by a VREF generator 410 that, as will be described hereinbelow, comprises a digital-to-analog converter (DAC). - The output of the
ADC 408 is a digital output that represents the difference between the analog output voltage on theDC output 406 and the “set point” generated by VREF generator 410. The output of the VREF generator 410 is typically the desired output voltage. As such, the operation of the control loop at regulation will typically result in a “0” output from theADC 408. As will be described hereinbelow, this is the “0” code for theADC 408. This is input to adigital compensator 412, which is operable to provide some phase lead in the loop. Thebuck converter 402 is comprised of a combination of a series inductor and shunt capacitor that forms an LC network, which provides a phase lag of 180°. The control loop will typically be provided by a negative feedback loop and will result in an additional negative phase shift of 180°. If the loop were allowed to operate in this manner, this would result in a 0° total phase change which would be an unstable loop. As such, thedigital compensator 412 provides some phase lead to stabilize the loop. The output ofdigital compensator 412 provides the digital control value u(n) on adigital output bus 414 for input to a digital pulse width modulator (DPWM) 416. This provides the various clock signals which provide the switching phases 404 to the buck converter 402 (or to a half bridge converter described herein above). - The
ADC 408,digital compensator 412 andDPWM 416 are realized in hardware such that they provide relatively fast digital response and, once operating, operate in a fixed manner. However, each of theADC 408,digital compensator 412,DPWM 416 and VREF generator 410 are operable to be configured and have the operation thereof monitored. The VREF generator 410 has aconfiguration block 420 associated therewith for configuring the operation thereof such that the voltage of the VREF generator 410 can be controlled. Additionally, amonitoring circuit 422 is provided for monitoring the operation thereof. Similarly, theADC 408 has aconfiguration block 424 for configuring the operation thereof and amonitoring block 426 for monitoring the operation thereof. Thedigital compensator 412 has aconfiguration block 428 for configuring the operation thereof and amonitoring block 430 for monitoring the operation thereof. TheDPWM 416 has aconfiguration block 432 for configuring the operation thereof and amonitoring block 436 for monitoring the operation thereof. - As will be described hereinbelow, the
ADC 408 is a parallel data converter that is configured with a Flash ADC topology. Thedigital compensator 412 is configured with a proportional-integral-derivative (PID) compensator with post processing filtering andDPWM 416 is realized with a state machine. The PID compensator is a discrete compensation network that is operable to apply a discrete time PID control law to the signal. The operation of each of these blocks is controlled through the associated configuration and monitoring blocks with amicrocontroller 440. Themicrocontroller 440 is an instruction based engine that operates on instructions that can be downloaded toFlash memory 442, which is non-volatile memory. Aserial data input 442 allows instructions to be input to themicrocontroller 440 for storage in thememory 442 and for various debug and control operations. Additionally, error handling is provided by ablock 446 that basically provides for over current protection and over voltage protection to prevent damage to thebuck converter 402 under certain conditions, as will be described in more detail hereinbelow. - By providing a digital controller that, when operating and configured, operates independent of the
programmable microcontroller 440, the functionality of the digital controller is embedded primarily within the circuitry of the primary block involving theADC block 408, thedigital compensator block 412 and theDPWM block 416. Themicrocontroller 440 basically is the “housekeeper” for the digital controller which is operable to monitor the operation thereof. When the digital controller is operating at voltage regulation and once configured, very few actions need to be taken by themicrocontroller 440. However, when the digital controller is originally configured, depending upon the environment, the type of switching converter utilized, etc., the digital controller will be configured by themicrocontroller 440 for a specific application. Even for the given application, there are certain transients that occur, such as when the converter is powered up, when short circuits occur, when transient loads are applied, etc. and, thus, certain parameters of the various blocks need to be varied to accommodate such during the operation of the DC-DC converter. By providing an instruction based engine such as themicrocontroller 440 in a monitoring mode and configuration mode, the operation of the digital controller can be monitored and then the parameters thereof changed temporarily, if necessary, to account for this change. To implement the entire digital controller in an instruction-based engine such as a DSP would require a large amount of programming operations. By providing a hardware based digital controller as the primary block, the functionality has been embedded within the hardware by the chip designer. The DSP solution, on the other hand, typically utilizes a general purpose DSP and the value or functionality of the digital controller is facilitated through programing, which can be complex and typically is utilized only for very high-end digital controllers. Further, the implementation of the primary digital control in hardware provides for a more efficient design that utilizes the circuitry and is more power efficient, which is important in low power DC-DC converters, without sacrificing the benefits of digital control. - Referring now to
FIG. 5 , there is illustrated a more detailed block diagram of the digital controller. TheADC 408 is a differential Flash ADC that is operable to determine as a digital value the difference between the voltage on theDC output node 406, that being the VSENSE voltage, and a reference voltage on anode 502. This analog reference voltage onnode 502 is generated by the VREF generator 410. This is comprised of an analogreference voltage generator 504 which is operable to generate a fixed analog reference voltage based on an internal reference such as a bandgap generator. The bandgap generator is a conventional circuit that is utilized to generate temperature and process stable voltages. This is not shown in the illustration ofFIG. 5 . The VREF generator 504 will generate this reference voltage and provide it as a reference input to a conventional reference digital-to-analog converter 506 (reference DAC). This is a scaling DAC that is operable to receive a digital word on abus 508 from a reference DAC control block 510 that is controlled by themicrocontroller 440. This is basically a register that can be written to for the purpose of generating the reference DAC voltage. Thereference DAC 506 is operable to convert this digital value onbus 508 to an analog voltage onnode 502 for input to one of the differential inputs of theADC 408. Typically, the voltage generated by VREF generator 504 is a 1.25 V analog voltage. The output of thereference DAC 506 comprises the desired voltage of the DC-DC converter. In one embodiment, this is approximately 1.0 V, a conventional processor voltage. The reference voltage onnode 502 is compared with the VSENSE voltage onnode 406 and, when regulated, this should essentially be zero. In the test mode of operation, there is provided aswitch 512 which is operable to short the two inputs together. This will be described hereinbelow. - The
ADC 408, as will be described hereinbelow, is a parallel ADC of the Flash type. It is a window ADC that is operable to generate a zero voltage output when the differential input is “0.” AnADC control block 514 is operable to provide a control input to theADC 408. Thecontrol block 514 provides a variable LSB input to theADC 408 for use with some of various features thereof. The ADC operates on an ADC CK clock signal and also generates an end of conversion cycle interrupt, EOC1 IRQ. This provides an indication of when a data conversion operation is complete on a given sample and digital data associated with the analog sample is ready to be output. The data is output through aninverter circuit 516 for input to one input of a 4-inputdigital multiplexer 518, which is part of the input interface to thedigital compensator 412. - The
digital compensator 412, in addition to receiving the output of theADC 408 through theinverter 516, is also operable to receive a ground input on adigital input bus 520, ADC data from aregister 522 through abus 524 for digitally generated ADC data, primarily for test purposes, and also a “raw” data input on abus 526. In one mode of operation, primarily associated with start-up and the such, the sensed voltage, VSENSE, is determined by another ADC, which is described hereinbelow, which is a SAR ADC. This is a slower ADC and the output thereof is stored in a special function register, VSENSE/SFR, the output of which is provided on abus 528. The difference between the digital representation of the VSENSE voltage and the actual input to referenceDAC 506 on thebus 508 is determined by adigital subtraction block 530, the output of which comprises thebus 526. Therefore, a single-ended SAR can be utilized to bypass theADC 408 and determine a value for input to thedigital compensator 412 during start-up and the such, this providing the differential operation in the digital domain. However, during regulation, theADC 408 is the preferred input data converter. - The output of the
multiplexer 518 is input to a PID controller block, which provides a proportional, integral, derivative (PID) control algorithm. One difficulty associated with designing a controller arises from the LC resonance of a buck converter. An open-loop frequency-response analysis exhibits a resonant peak at the cutoff frequency of the LC filter. A sharp peak, quantified by the quality factor (Q), is desirable for efficient power conversion for lossless power conversion. For a simple integral control, this resonant peak must be kept below unity gain in the open-loop frequency response to ensure stability. Such a controller configuration has a low loop bandwidth and leads to slow transit response characteristic. ThisPID block 540 provides the requisite loop stability without sacrificing bandwidth and improves the loop's transient response. The proportional and derivative control blocks, as will be described hereinbelow, introduce compensation zeros that push unity-gain beyond the resonant peak and eliminates the bandwidth limitation otherwise imposed by the resonant nature of the buck converter. There is provided a PID control block 542 that controls the operation of thePID 540 by providing, as will be set forth hereinbelow, gain constants for the operation thereof. The operation is clocked with a filter clock, FILTCLK, on aclock input 544. The input to thePID 540 is determined by the output ofmultiplexer 518, which is controlled by a PIDinput control block 546. The clock rate is around 10 MHz, wherein the switching frequency of the power supply is around 500 kHz - The analog corollary to the digital controller has one inherent benefit in that the overall operation of the analog controller has an inherent low pass filter function associated therewith. The
PID 540, on the other hand, has an amplitude and phase response that increases with increasing frequency such that the gain thereof becomes relatively high at higher frequencies and the phase also increases in an ever increasing phase leading manner. To accommodate the frequency response of the PID, post processing filtering is required. This is facilitated in the present embodiment with either a low pass filter, represented by anLPF filter block 550 or asinc filter block 552. The output of thePID 540 is input to both of theseblocks digital multiplexer 554. Thesinc filter operation 552 provides for a plurality of “notches” which are controlled by asinc control block 556, thesinc filter block 552 clocked by the FILTCLK clock signal. TheLPF filter block 550 also utilizes variable poles and zeros that are set by anLPF control block 558. TheLPF filter block 550 is also clocked by the filter clock, FILTCLK. The output ofmultiplexer 554 provides the output from thedigital compensator 412, the output selected by themultiplexer 554 controlled by a filterselect block 560. - The output of the
multiplexer 554 from thedigital compensator 412 is provided on adigital data bus 562. This is input to a PID data register 564 for the purpose of monitoring the operation thereof, such that the output of thedigital compensator block 412 can be monitored. The output of themultiplexer 554 is also input to the input of a two-inputdigital multiplexer 566, the other input thereof receiving data from the PID data block 564, such that the operation of thecompensator 412 can be bypassed. Themultiplexer 566 is controlled by a DPWMinput control block 568. The output of themultiplexer 566 provides the u(n) error signal, which is output on abus 570 to theDPWM 416. TheDPWM 416, as set forth hereinabove, is a state machine and is controlled by aDPWM control block 572. The DPWM block, as will be described hereinbelow, is operable to receive various control signals from the DPWM control block 572 from themicrocontroller 442 and is also operable to generate a plurality of interrupts (not shown) and receive various interrupts. For example, at the end of a given frame, there will be an EOFIRQ interrupt generated, and theDPWM 416 will also receive various interrupts from theerror handling block 446 to indicate either over current situations or over voltage situations. - Referring now to
FIG. 6 , there is illustrated a detailed block diagram of themicrocontroller 440. Thismicrocontroller 440 is an 8051 instruction-based engine which is substantially disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/244,344, filed on Sep. 16, 2002 and entitled “Precision Oscillator for an Asynchronous Transmission System,” which is incorporated herein in its entirety by reference for all purposes whatsoever. At the center of themicrocontroller 440 is aprocessing core 602 which is an 8051 microprocessor engine. This is an instruction-based engine. There is provided a 32K byteFlash memory block byte IRAM block 606 and a 1Kbyte XRAM block 608, providing memory for theprocessing core 602. Clock signals are provided to thecore 602 in the form of a system clock, SYSCLK, on aclock line 610. This is provided on the output of amultiplexer 612. The multiplexer is operable to receive the input thereof from a 20 MHzboot oscillator block 614, an input from an 80 kHz lowfrequency oscillator block 616 to provide an 80 kHz clock for use in a sleep mode, or a higher frequency clock in the form of a divided down 25MHz oscillator 618. The 25 MHz oscillator is the primary oscillator at the operating frequency of thecore 602, as thecore 602 operates at high frequency or at low frequency. However, at low frequency, the processing of instructions occurs at a much slower rate and this mode is typically used in a sleep mode. In the normal operating mode, typically the higher frequency clock oscillator is utilized. This clock is a non-crystal based clock and has an accuracy of approximately 2%. The output of theclock 618 is input through a two-input multiplexer 620 to themultiplexer 612, the output ofmultiplexer 620 passed through adivide block 622 in order to divide the frequency of the clock, if necessary. Additionally, an external clock is input to the other input ofmultiplexer 620, such that either the internally generated 25 MHz clock can be utilized or an external clock can be utilized. Aphase lock loop 624 is provided which is controlled by aPLL control block 626 and this utilizes the 25MHz clock 618 as a reference and then multiplies this clock up to as high as 400 kHz. This provides an output to one end of themultiplexer 612 for selection as the SYSCLK. ThisPLL 624 is operable to generate the other clocks associated with the operation of a digital controller, the clock for theDPWM 416, PWMCK, the filter clock, FILTCLK, and the ADC clock, ADCCLK. This will be described hereinbelow. - The
core 602 is also operable to receive a Reset signal on ablock 630, which is operable to generate a reset when it is not in a debug operating mode. In a debug operating mode, the Reset input on anode 631 is input to the clock input of adebug hardware block 634 to provide a clock signal thereto, the other input being a serial data input on aline 635. This is a two-wire serial data port that allows for very low clocked data to be input to thecore 602 during a debug mode. In the reset mode, thereset block 630 provides the reset signal to thecore 602. - The
core 602 is interfaced through a special function register (SFR)bus 630 to various I/O blocks. In the embodiment illustrated herein, fourtimers 632 are provided. Each of these timers is operable to have the parameters thereof set, and initiated and each of them generates various timer interrupts, TMRXX IRQ, signals. Additionally, there are provided a number of serial bus configurations for allowing for various formats of a serial data interface. One of these is the SM Bus/I2C format, in ablock 634. This is a conventional serial data format. Additionally, there is provided a UART functionality in ablock 636. There is provided a programmable counter/timer array (PCA) block 638 and a plurality of port latches 640 for interfacing with a port “0”block 642 and a port “1”block 644 for transmitting and receiving data therefrom. All of the blocks 632-640 are interfaced through acrossbar matrix block 646, which is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,738,858, issued May 18, 2004, which is incorporated herein by reference. The crossbar matrix is operable to selectively connect any of the outputs of the blocks 632-640 to any of a plurality of output pins associated with theport driver pins 650 associated with the port “0”driver 642 and eightpins 652 associated with the port “1” driver. These pins can function as digital outputs, digital inputs or analog inputs. - For analog sensing, all of the eight
pins 652 associated with the port “1” driver are connectable to analog inputs of a multipleinput analog multiplexer 656 which is operable to receive eight analog inputs, AIN0, AIN1, . . . , AIN7, a VSENSE input and a Temperature input. The input voltage is connected to the AIN0 input for sensing thereof. A separate dedicated pin is provided for the VSENSE input for input to themultiplexer 656. An additional input is provided by aninternal temperature sensor 658, which senses the chip temperature, which basically constitutes the environmental temperature, this being an input to theanalog multiplexer 656. The output of theanalog multiplexer 656 is input to the input of a 12-bit SAR ADC 660, operating at a sampling clock of 500 Ksps. This is a single-ended ADC that provides the digital output on abus 662. The control for theADC 660 is provided by theADC control block 664. Theanalog multiplexer 656 is controlled by anauto scan block 666, which is operable to scan through all of the inputs in a cyclical manner. At the end of each conversion cycle, there is generated an interrupt EOC0 IRQ indicating the end of the conversion cycle for theADC 660. This is input to theauto scan block 666 which will then increment the select control on the multiplexer to the next input to initiate a second or subsequent conversion operation. For each scan step, the output of theADC 660 is “steered” or directed toward an associated special function register (SFR)/limiter (LIM). Each of these SFR/LIM blocks is operable to store the associated output, compare it with an internal fixed upper and/or lower limit, which can be varied upon power-up, and then output an interrupt if it exceeds the limit(s). In the first five SFR/LIM, there is provided an ADC window interrupt in an SFR/LIM block 668, an SFR/LIM block for the VSENSE output 670, an SFR/LIM block 672 for the AIN0 output, an SFR/LIM block 674 for the AIN1 input, and an SFR/LIM block 676 for the AIN2 input. Each of these blocks 668-676 provide an associated interrupt, ADC0WINTIRQ, VSENSE IRQ, AIN0VIN IRQ, AIN1 IRQ, and AIN2 IRQ. Since thecore 602 can only handle a certain number of interrupts, the remaining inputs, AIN3-AIN7 and TEMP are associated with respective SFR/LIM blocks 678. The output of eachblock 678 provides an associated interrupt to an OR gate 681. The output of theOR gate 680 provides an interrupt, which when recognized by thecore 602, requires that thecore 602 then “poll” the outputs of the SFR/LIM blocks 678, it being recognized that each of the SFR/LIM blocks occupies a unique address in the address space of thecore 602, such that the contents thereof can be read, or in certain circumstances, written to. Whenever an interrupt is generated, thecore 602 initiates an interrupt sub-routine for servicing that particular interrupt, as is the case with any interrupt generated. - There is also provided a comparator function for generating a comparator interrupt. A
comparator block 680 is provided which is operable to have one compare input interface with the even ones of thepin 652 and a second input interface with the odd inputs thereto. This is a four comparator block, which is controlled by acomparator control block 682 and will generate a comparator interrupt whenever any of the respective inputs exceeds the threshold set therein. - Referring now to
FIG. 6 a, there is illustrated a diagrammatic view of anintegrated circuit 690, which is operable to provide all of the functions for the digital control operation in a single integrated circuit Thisintegrated circuit 690 requires only connections from VSENSE on apin 692, switching control signals onoutput pins 693, a power supply input on apower supply pin 694 and a ground connection on apin 695. With these minimal number of pins, the entire digital control operation can be facilitated. This assumes that a program is provided in thememory 442. If the program is not “hard coded,” some type of serial connection on at least onepin 696 is required, but it should be understood that other pins in the system can be multiplexed for use in programming, since programming is facilitated in an operating mode. Further, there are provided a plurality ofpins 697 that are operable to receive other sense analog input voltages. However, for the straightforward operation of the digital controller, all that is required is the VSENSE input. The other inputs are required for such things as over voltage protection and over current protection and for detecting the peak current for the purposes of voltage positioning, as will be described hereinbelow. - As set forth hereinabove, the digital control section is a hardware digital control section comprised of the
ADC 408, thedigital compensation network 412 and theDPWM 416. Once these blocks are parameterized, they will provide the control function associated therewith. Theinternal reference generator 410 is operable to provide the internal reference, for conversion to an analog signal by theDAC 506. Thus, all the voltage reference information is contained in theintegrated circuit 690. The on chip self-contained microcontroller provides the monitoring and control functions such as over current protection, voltage positioning, etc. and, in general, provides all housekeeping functions to monitor the operation of the hardware digital control stream. The self-contained clock and on-board memory provide for the timing functions and the instructions for use by the microcontroller, respectively. Therefore, it can be seen that the system of the present disclosure provides for a single monolithic solution that is low power due to the use of a state machine-driven digital controller without requiring the power overhead of an instruction based system, but still retains the intelligence of an instruction based system in the monitoring and reparameterizing aspect provided by themicrocontroller 440. - Flash ADC
- Referring now to
FIG. 7 , there is illustrated a logic diagram of thewindow ADC 408. A first reference voltage is generated by an on-chip bandgap generator, a voltage VBG. The bandgap generator is a conventional circuit that combines a very stable voltage that is stable over temperature. This voltage is input to the voltage follower circuit comprised of anamplifier 702, the output thereof driving the gate of a p-channel transistor 704. The source/drain path of thetransistor 704 is connected between VDD and anode 708.Node 708 is connected to the other input ofamplifier 702, such that theamplifier 702 andtransistor 704 provide a source follower configuration.Node 708 is connected to astring 710 of resistors of value “5R.” The output ofamplifier 702 also drives a current mirror, such that the current throughresistor string 710 is mirrored over to the current mirror. The current mirror is comprised of a p-channel transistor 712 and the gate thereof connected to anode 714,node 714 connected to the output ofamplifier 702. The source/drain oftransistor 712 is connected between VDD and anode 728.Node 728 is connected to one side of the source/drain path of an n-channel transistor 716, the other side thereof connected to ground. The gate anddrain transistor 716 are connected together tonode 728 to form a diode-connected configuration.Node 714 is also connected to a variable width p-channel transistor 718, the source/drain path thereof connected between VDD and anode 720.Transistor 718, as will be described herein below, is comprised of a plurality of parallel connected binary-weighted transistors, the connection thereof being programmable, such that one or all of the parallel connected transistors can be connected in parallel on a selective basis. -
Node 720 is connected on one side thereof to a resistor string comprised of a plurality ofresistors 722. There are provided sixty four of theseresistors 722 having a total resistive value of “R,” each having a voltage disposed there across equal to the voltage of a least significant bit (LSB) of the ADC. This will be described in more detail herein below. The bottom of the resistor string ofresistors 722 is connected to anode 724, which is connected on one side thereof to the drain of a variable n-channel transistor 726, the source thereof connected to ground, and the gate thereof connected to the gate oftransistor 716 on anode 728.Transistor 726 is substantially identical totransistor 718 and is also programmable to allow selection of the number of transistors connected together, which will be described in more detail herein below. - A voltage input on an
input node 730 represents the negative input voltage. This is input to one input of aunity gain amplifier 732, which has the other input thereof connected to the output onanode 734.Node 734 represents the mid-point of the resistor string ofresistors 722, such that there are an equal number of resistors above as below. Thus, for the disclosed embodiment of sixty fourresistors 722, there will be thirty two resistors above and thirty two resistors below thepoint 734. Theunity gain amplifier 732 provides thedrive voltage node 734 and isolates the input voltage onnode 730 therefrom. - The current through
resistor string 710 is ratiometrically related to the current throughtransistors resistors 722. Thus, the current throughresistors 722 is set by the current throughresistor string 710, which current is set by the voltage on the input toamplifier 702, voltage VBG, such that the current is VBG/5R. The only way to vary the current of theresistors 722 is through the ratio of the size of thetransistors transistor 704. This will be described in more detail herein below. - Each of
resistors 722, at the bottom thereof, is connected to one of sixty four comparators on one input thereof ofcomparators 740, on one input thereof. (It is noted that the number sixty four defines a “window,” but any number of comparators could be utilized to represent the entire Flash ADC window). The other input of each of thecomparators 740 is connected to anode 742, which is connected to the positive input voltage VIN+. Therefore, the output of each of the respective comparators will be a “0” if the input voltage is below the resistor tap voltage and a “1” if the input voltage is above the associated tap voltage. The outputs of all of thecomparators 740 having the reference input connected to resistor taps below the input voltage will have a “1” on the output thereof. This, therefore, represents a thermometer code on the output thereof. This is input to adecoder 746 to decode the thermometer code and provide the digital output therefrom. - The output voltage from
decoder 746, DOUT represents the difference voltage between the voltage onnode 742 and the voltage onnode 730, VIN+−VIN−. By comparing the positive input voltage onnode 742 to the negative input voltage onnode 730, the output voltage, VOUT, will have are solution defined by the voltage across each of theresistors 722, this being the LSB of voltage. This overall circuit provides the circuitry of the Flash ADC, this being a “window” Flash ADC as opposed to an absolute value ADC. When the difference between the voltage on positiveinput voltage node 742 and negativeinput voltage node 730 is “0,” thecomparators 740 below thenode 734 will have a “1” on the output thereof and thecomparator 740 having the reference input thereof connected tonode 734 will have a “0” on the output thereof. This, as will be described herein below, represents the “0” code for the Flash ADC, this being a differential input ADC. As the size of thetransistors resistors 722 and, therefore, vary the size of the LSB. However, the “0” code will not vary. In effect, the negative input voltage onnode 730 represents the reference voltage input of the ADC whereas the positive input voltage onnode 742 represents the analog input voltage. - To distinguish the current architecture of the Flash ADC with a conventional architecture, the prior art Flash ADC of
FIG. 8 will be described. InFIG. 8 , a four comparator Flash ADC is described. A reference voltage is defined that is variable, this being for the purpose of varying the size of the LSBs. This reference voltage is provided on anode 802 at the top of a resistor ladder comprised of a plurality of tappedresistors 804. At each of the taps, there is an output provided to the reference input of an associatedcomparator 806. The other input on each of thecomparators 806 is connected to aninput node 808. For a single ended input, the reference voltage onnode 802 will typically be connected to the supply voltage andresistor 804 adjusted such that the full rail-to-rail voltage could be provided. In this example, this would only provide a resolution of ¼ of the supply voltage. Typically, a very large number ofcomparators 806 will be provided associated with a large number of resistors. For a 16-bit Flash ADC, this would require 216 comparators and a corresponding number of resistors. This results in a significant power consumption for each of the comparators. However, for a differential input signal, it is only necessary to resolve the difference between a positive and negative input signal over a defined range. Thus, a smaller reference voltage can be utilized which is divided by a predetermined number of resistors in thecorresponding comparator 806. In a prior art embodiment, the differential input voltage is determined by adifferential amplifier 810 receiving the positive and negative input voltage and outputting a differential voltage onnode 808. This differential voltage is then input to the input of each of thecomparators 806. Of course, in order to utilize the full range, the output of theamplifier 810 must be centered around some common node voltage which is equal to VREF/2. In one alternate embodiment, the prior art system ofFIG. 8 can have the LSB is changed by a factor of, for example, 10×, which will require the common mode voltage, VCM=Vref/2, to change by a factor of 10×. Although this will provide a stable zero code, the common mode voltage, VCM, of theamplifier 810 should be around VCM/2 in order to have a large voltage swing. - It can be seen that, if the LSB size is varied through a variation of the reference voltage, this will cause the reference voltage on the zero-code node to change. If, for example, a
node 820 associated with the second from thetop comparator 806 on the reference input thereof represents the zero-code wherein the positive input voltage equals the negative input voltage, then, when the positive input voltage equals the negative input voltage, this comparator will have a “0” on the output thereof, comparators above will have a “0” output and comparators below will have a “1” output. As long as the voltage difference is “0,” and the reference voltage is not varied, then the zero-code will not change but, if the voltage VREF is changed, the size of the LSB will change and the zero code will also change, since the zero-code is now “coupled” to the value of VREF. Therefore, if the LSB is required to be changed, then the tap associated with the resistor string that defines the zero-code may change. This will be described in more detail herein below. - Associated with each of the inputs of the
comparator 806, is a distributed capacitance, which distributed capacitance would sum up to a total capacitance of CT, represented bycapacitor 814. It can be seen that theamplifier 810 must drive thecapacitance 814 during a conversion operation. By reducing the number of comparators in the “window,” the value of CT can be reduced, in addition to the power consumption. However, theamplifier 810 must still drive this input with a capacitance. - Referring now to
FIG. 9 , there is illustrated a simplified diagram of the disclosed ADC ofFIG. 7 , which is utilized for comparison therewith to the prior art embodiment ofFIG. 8 . In this embodiment, it can be seen that the resistive string comprised of theresistors 722 are driven by an uppercurrent source 902 from the supply voltage, VDD, and the bottom of the resistive string is driven with a lowercurrent source 904. Both of these current sources provide a current IREF, which is variable. This variable current source varies the current through theresistors 722 and, therefore, sets the size of the LSB or, more specifically, the resolution of the ADC. The voltage on thenode 734 is a negative input voltage and this provides the center reference voltage of the window with thecurrent sources current source 902 and decreasing towardcurrent source 904. As the voltage onnode 734 varies, the voltage acrossnode resistors 722 does not vary, as that voltage is controlled by thecurrent sources current sources - As will be described herein below, each of the
current sources 902 an 904 are identical and are comprised of four separate parallel connected current sources, each having a binary-weighted current there through, such that a binary word can be input thereto for defining the value thereof. In the disclosed embodiment, there are provided four current sources, a 1× current source, a 2× current source, a 4× current source and an 8× current source, associated with a 4-bit word. This, however, is not meant to be limiting in that any number of current sources could be utilized, and any type of variable method for varying the current source could be utilized. - The output voltage, VOUT is defined in the following equation:
D OUT=(V IN+ −V IN−)G - The value of G is related to the inverse of LSB as follows:
The current through the resistor string is a ratiometric current such that it is the current through theresistor string 710 multiplied by a ratio metric factor α. Thus, the current through the resistor string ofresistors 722 provided bytransistors
where: - R is the total value of the sixty four
resistors 722 in the ladder; and - α is a scaling or ratiometric factor.
Thus, the LSB is defined as the current through a given resistor and it will be multiplied by the current through the resistor string multiplied by the value of resistor, R, as follows:
where: - K is a factor representing the number of
resistors 722 in the resistor string, there being sixty four in the disclosed embodiment. - As noted herein above, the ratio metric multiplier is a binary weighted multiplier that, in the disclosed embodiment, utilizes a 4-bit word. This will be defined by the following relationship:
where:
Thus, it can be seen that the value of R is removed from the equation such that temperature and process variations therein do not affect the value of the LSB. All that is necessary is to have a stable voltage, this provided by the bandgap voltage generator. - Referring now to
FIGS. 10 and 10 a, there is illustrated a logic diagram for a comparator bank, each comparator bank representing each of thecomparators 740. This comparator string is a differential comparator having a positive input and a negative input. The positive input is connected to the positive input voltage on thenode 742 which is connected to the voltage VIN+. The other input is connected to anode 1002 which is the tap voltage VTAP, this reference input to the comparator. There is provided afirst comparator 1004 having a reference voltage input onnode 1006 and a primary input on anode 1008.Node 1002 is connected to one side of aswitch 1010, the other side thereof connected tonode 1006. Similarly, thenode 742 is connected through one side of aswitch 1012, the other side thereof connected tonode 1008.Node 1002 is also connected to one side of twoswitches 1014 and 1016, the other sides thereof connected to thenodes Switches switches 1014 and 1016 are controlled by the clock signal φ2. - The output of
comparator 1004 is provided ondifferential outputs Output 1020 is connected to one side of asample capacitor 1024 and thenode 1022 is connected to one side of asample capacitor 1026, both having a value of “C.” The other side of thecapacitor 1024 is connected to anode 1028, which comprises one input of asecond comparator 1030. The other side ofcapacitor 1026 is connected to anode 1032, which is connected to the other input of thecomparator 1030, thecomparator 1030 being a differential input comparator.Node 1028 is connected to one side of aswitch 1034, and the other side thereof is connected to adifferential output node 1036 ofcomparator 1030. Similarly,node 1032 is connected to one side of aswitch 1038, the other side thereof connected to a seconddifferential output node 1040 ofdifferential comparator 1030.Nodes reconfigurable latch 1042.Switches reconfigurable latch 1042 is controlled by a clock signal φ3. Thereconfigurable latch 1042 is operable to provide a latched output ondifferential outputs dynamic latch 1048, which is controlled by a clock signal φ4. This provides a latched output for input to a T-latch 1046, which is clocked by a clock signal to provide a data output, this being the output of theoverall comparator 740. - Referring now to
FIG. 11 , there are illustrated timing diagrams for the clock signals associated with the embodiment ofFIG. 10 . The operation of the comparator bank will be described with reference to these clock signals. When φ1 goes high, as denoted by anedge 1102, theswitches respective nodes edge 1104. This will result inswitches comparator 1030 such that the voltage onnodes switches 1014 and 1016 are open, since the clock φ2 is low at this time. This is the sampling operation. Thereafter, φ1 goes low at anedge 1106 and φ2 goes high at anedge 1108, thus openingswitches closing switches 1014 and 1016. This, in effect, disposes thenodes capacitors nodes comparator 1004 onnodes comparator 1004 will have an offset voltage VOS1 associated therewith. This offset voltage and difference voltage will be multiplied by the gain ofcomparator 1004, a gain A1. Therefore, the output voltage onnodes nodes nodes comparator 1004 is effectively removed in the hold operation. - It can further be seen that the
capacitors nodes node 742 will not be required to drive a large capacitance. Theamplifier 732 isolates the negative input voltage onnode 730 fromnode 734 and from all the subsequent tap voltages. However, the input voltage onnode 742 is required to drive the inputs of each of themultiple comparators 740. The sampling operation requires a larger capacitance for the purpose of holding the charge for a predetermined amount of time. Since this larger capacitor is disposed on the opposite side ofcomparator 1004, it can be seen that the need for driving a very large capacitance and holding the voltage on that large capacitance is reduced, as the charge driven to the capacitor is driven from internal circuitry to thecomparator 1004, as opposed to a driving circuit associated with thenode 742. Thus, the drive of the sampling capacitors is distributed among all of thecomparators 740. - Referring now to
FIG. 12 , there is illustrated a schematic diagram of thetransistors transistor 718 is comprised of four binaryweighted transistors node 720. The gate oftransistor 1202 is connected through the source/drain path of a p-channel transistor 1210 tonode 714, the gate thereof connected to bit b0-Bar. The gate oftransistor 1204 is connected tonode 714 through the source/drain path of a p-channel transistor 1212, the gate thereof connected to bit b1-Bar. The gate oftransistor 1206 is connected tonode 714 through the source/drain path of a p-channel transistor 1214, the gate thereof connected to bit b2-Bar. The gate oftransistor 1208 is connected tonode 714 through the source/drain path of a p-channel transistor 1216, the gate thereof connected to bit b3-Bar. Therefore, when the respective bits are a logic “high,” then the respective gate transistors 1210-1216 will connect the gate of the respective transistors 1202-1208 tonode 714. Transistors 1202-1208 are binary weighted in size. Thetransistor 1202 has a size of , for reference purposes, 1×,transistor 1204 has a size of 2×,transistor 1206 has a size of 4× andtransistor 1208 has a size of 8×. Therefore, the amount of current that will flow through the transistors is correspondingly larger. This provides the binary weighting, a fairly conventional weighted current scheme. - When the transistors 1202-1208 are deselected, their gates will be pulled high. A pull-up p-
channel transistor 1220 has the source/drain path thereof connected between the gate oftransistor 1202 and a supply voltage VDD, and the gate thereof connected to bit b0. A pull-up p-channel transistor 1222 has the source/drain path thereof connected between VDD and the gate oftransistor 1204 and the gate thereof connected to bit b1 . A pull-up p-channel transistor 1224 has the source/drain path thereof connected between VDD and the gate oftransistor 1206 and the gate thereof connected to bit b2. A pull-up p-channel transistor 1226 has the source/drain path thereof connected between VDD and the gate oftransistor 1208 and the gate thereof connected to bit b3. - The
transistor 726 is comprised of four n-channel transistors node 724 and ground and sized in a binary weighted manner similar to transistors 1202-1208, such that they are respectively identical thereto in size. The gate oftransistor 1230 is connected tonode 728 through an n-channel transistor 1238, the gate thereof connected to bit b0. The gate oftransistor 1232 is connected through an n-channel gate transistor 1240 tonode 728, the gate thereof connected to bit b1. The gate oftransistors 1234 is connected through an n-channel gate transistor 1242 tonode 728, the gate thereof connected to bit b2. The gate oftransistor 1236 is connected through an n-channel gate transistor 1244 tonode 728, the gate thereof connected to the bit b3. Thus, by selecting the ones of the gated transistors 1238-1244, the binary weighted transistors 1230-1236 can be selectively connected betweennode 724 and ground. When not selected, the gates thereof are pulled low through the source/drain paths of pull-down n-channel transistors - Referring now to
FIG. 13 , there is illustrated a schematic diagram of thecomparator 1004. This is a differential input comparator that is comprised of two differential input n-channel transistors common source node 1306.Node 1306 is connected through the source/drain path of an n-channel transistor 1305 to ground, the gate thereof connected to a bias voltage onanode 1308. A diode connected n-channel transistor 1310 has the source/drain path thereof connected betweennode 1308 and ground and the gate thereof connected tonode 1308. This provides the bias for thenode 1306 for thetransistor 1305. The drain oftransistor 1302 is connected to anegative output node 1312 and the drain oftransistor 1304 is connected to anode 1314, the positive output node. A cross coupled p-channel transistor pair comprised of a p-channel transistor 1316 connected between VDD and node 1312 a tap-channel transistor 1318 connected between VDD andnode 1314 is configured such that the gate oftransistor 1316 is connected to the opposite node,node 1314, and the gate oftransistor 1318 is connected to the opposite node,node 1312. A diode connected p-channel transistor 1320 is connected between VDD andnode 1312, the gate thereof connected tonode 1312. A diode connected p-channel transistor 1324 is connected between VDD andnode 1314, the gate thereof connected tonode 1314. The gate oftransistor 1302 is the positive input and the gate oftransistor 1304 is the negative input. - Referring now to
FIG. 14 , there is illustrated a schematic diagram of thecomparator 1030. This is a differential input comparator that is comprised of two differential input n-channel transistors common source node 1406.Node 1406 is connected through the source/drain path of an n-channel transistor 1405 to ground, the gate thereof connected to a bias voltage on anode 1408. A diode connected n-channel transistor 1410 has the source/drain path thereof connected betweennode 1408 and ground and the gate thereof connected tonode 1408. This provides the bias for thenode 1406 for thetransistor 1405. The drain oftransistor 1402 is connected to anegative output node 1412 and the drain oftransistor 1404 is connected to anode 1414, the positive output node. A cross coupled p-channel transistor pair comprised of a p-channel transistor 1416 connected between VDD andnode 1412 and a p-channel transistor 1418 connected between VDD andnode 1414 is configured such that the gate oftransistor 1416 is connected to the opposite node,node 1414, and the gate oftransistor 1418 is connected to the opposite node,node 1412. A diode connected p-channel transistor 1420 is connected between VDD andnode 1412, the gate thereof connected tonode 1412. A diode connected p-channel transistor 1424 is connected between VDD andnode 1414, the gate thereof connected tonode 1414. The gate oftransistor 1402 is a positive input and the gate oftransistor 1404 is the negative input. This is a conventional design. - A p-
channel transistor 1440 that has the source/drain path thereof connected betweennodes transistor 1440 is connected to a clock signal φ1 pre, such that, when activated, the gain of thecomparator stage 1030 is substantially reduced. This clock signal is not shown inFIG. 11 . - Referring now to
FIG. 15 , there is illustrated a schematic diagram of thereconfigurable latch 1042. This latch has two modes of operation. In the first mode, the gain is set at a relatively low gain and, in a second mode, the gain is increased substantially. The input is provided by a common source pair of differential input n-channel transistors common source node 1506. The n-channel transistor 1510 is connected betweennode 1506 and ground with the gate thereof connected to a bias voltage on anode 1508. The drain oftransistor 1502 is connected to anegative output node 1512 and the drain oftransistor 1504 is connected to anode 1514, the positive output node. A cross-coupled pair of p-channel transistors transistor 1516 connected between VDD and node 15 and the source/drain path oftransistor 1518 connected between VDD andnode 1514. The gate oftransistor 1516 is connected tonode 1514 and the gate oftransistor 1518 is connected tonode 1512. A p-channel transistor 1520 has the source/drain path thereof connected betweennodes node 1524. A diode connected p-channel transistor 1526 is connected between VDD and a node 1528 (p-channel), the gate thereof connected tonode 1528. A second diode connected p-channel transistor 1530 is connected betweennode 1528 andnode 1524, the gate thereof connected tonode 1524. An n-channel transistor 1532 is connected betweennode 1524 and ground, the gate thereof connected to the bias voltage onnode 1508. Ap-channel transistor 1534 has the source/drain path thereof connected VDD andnode 1524, the gate thereof connected to the clock signal φ3. In general, thetransistor 1520 is operated in the triode region and, therefore, when turned on, constitutes a resistor. The input impedance looking into the source oftransistor 1516 and into the source oftransistor 1518 is equal to −1/gm. Whentransistor 1520 is turned on, it provides a resistance, R1520, that is disposed in parallel with this impedance. Initially, this is a negative impedance until a transistor is turned on, at which time it is impedance above zero, which, when turned on, results in a relatively low gain. When turned off, the gain goes high. Thus, when φ3 goes high,node 1524 is biased to place thetransistor 1520 in the triode region. This occurs at an edge 910 on the waveform φ3 inFIG. 11 . This occurs prior to theswitches 1014 and 1016 closing in response to φ2 going high at theedge 1108. Thus, prior to the sample operation, thelatch 1042 is configured for a low gain operation. When φ2 goes high atedge 1108, thereconfigurable latch 1042 will evaluate the difference voltage at the gates oftransistors output nodes edge 1112, this value will be latched on the outputs. - Referring now to
FIG. 16 , there is illustrated a plot of gain of the reconfigurable latch when φ3 is high. It can be seen that the gain varies from a value of 4.5 at a substantially zero voltage input to a value of 1.5 at a voltage of 100 millivolts and a voltage of 1.0 at a value of 200 millivolts on the input. - Referring now to
FIG. 17 , there is illustrated a schematic diagram of thedynamic latch 1048. There are provided two n-channel gate transistors respective nodes transistors channel transistors common source node 1714 and the drains thereof connected respectively tonodes channel transistor 1716 is connected betweennode 1714 and ground and controlled by the φ4 clock signal. Therefore, the sources oftransistors Node 1706 is associated with a positive output andnode 1708 is associated with a negative output. Two cross-coupled p-channel transistors transistor 1720 connected between anode 1724 andnode 1706 andtransistor 1722 connected betweennode 1724 andnode 1708. The gate oftransistor 1720 is connected tonode 1708 and the gate oftransistor 1722 is connected tonode 1706. A p-channel gate transistor 1726 is provided for connection between VDD andnode 1724 and the gate thereof connected to the clock signal φ4-Bar. Thus, whentransistor 1726 is turned on,node 1724 is connected to VDD. - In operation, when the clock signal φ2 goes high, the differential output of the reconfigurable latch is connected to
nodes edge 114, the same time that φ2 goes low at a negative fallingedge 116. Thus, the output of the reconfigurable latch which is provided at the falling edge of φ3, fallingedge 112, will be disposed onnodes latch 1048 is powered down. Whentransistors nodes latch 1048 by turning ontransistors - Digital Compensator
- Referring now to
FIG. 18 , there is illustrated a simplified diagrammatic view of the digital controller and thedigital compensator 412. ThePID block 540 is comprised of three paths that are summed with a summingjunction 1802. The first path provides a proportional relationship with ablock 1804, the second path provides an integration function with anintegration block 1806 and the third block provides a differentiation path with ablock 1808. As noted hereinabove, this is referred as a PID controller. Theproportional block 1804 has a steady state proportional gain, Kp, and provides zero phase lag. The integral path andintegration block 1806 has an integral gain, Ki, which generally reduces the steady state error. There is some phase lag associated with this. The differential path associated with thedifferentiation block 1808 has a derivative gain, Kd, which provides some phase lead by anticipating future operations. Thus, theoverall PID block 540 provides phase compensation for the overall control loop. - The output of the summing
junction 1802 is input to, as described hereinabove, either alow pass filter 550 or asinc filter 552. Thelow pass filter 550 is comprised of ablock 1810 that has associated therewith a low pass filter frequency response with two poles. This is passed through anamplification stage 1812 with another coefficient associated with the amplification, this being the coefficient that is controlled by themicrocontroller 440. Thus, there are three coefficients, a1, a2 and a3 that control the operation of the lowpass filter function, these being the coefficients of the low pass filter. Thesinc filter 552 is basically comprised of a summing block or anaccumulation block 1814, which is operable to sum over a range of delay values, this being a decimation type sinc filter. A gain factor is provided by anamplification stage 1816 which has a coefficient a0 associated therewith. This a0 will set the position of the sinc filter notch, as will be described hereinbelow. Amultiplexer 1818 is operable to select between the output ofamplification stage 1812 and theamplification stage 1816 for input to theDPWM 406. - Referring now to
FIG. 19 , there is illustrated a more detailed block diagram of thePID 540 and thelowpass filter 550 and thesinc filter 552. The proportional path of theblock 1804 has againstage 1902 associated therewith with the gain factor Kp. This is controlled by thePID control block 542. The integral block has again block 1904 associated therewith with the integral gain factor Ki. The output of this is passed through atransfer function 1/(1 −z −1) in ablock 1906. The output of this block is input to the summingjunction 1802. The integration path and theblock 1808 are comprised of again block 1908 with a differential gain Kd. The output of thisgain block 1908 is input to adelay block 1910 to provide the delay (1−z−1). The output ofblock 1910 is input to the summingjunction 1802. Additionally, there is provided amultiplexer 1970 having one input thereof connected to theinput 1901 and the other input connected to a digital word with a value of “0.” The output of themultiplexer 1970 is input to the input of thegain block 1904. In that error condition, the “0” value can be selected such that the integration path is on hold. This will be described in more detail hereinbelow. - The low pass filter is configured with an
input summing junction 1912, the output thereof connected to adelay block 1914 with a delay of z−1. The output ofdelay block 1914 is connected to anode 1916, whichnode 1916 has a signal associated therewith fed back through acoefficient block 1918 with a coefficient a2, the output thereof input to the summingblock 1912.Node 1916 is also input to one input of a summingjunction 1918, the output thereof connected to the input of acoefficient block 1920, the output thereof providing the output of the low pass filter on anode 1922. The input to delayblock 1914 is also input to summingjunction 1912.Node 1916 is input through adelay block 1924 with a delay z−1, the output thereof input through acoefficient block 1926 with a coefficient a, to another input of the summingjunction 1912. The lowpass filter control block 558 sets the coefficients a1, a2 and a3. In general, this is a Butterworth configuration low pass filter, a fairly conventional digital filter. - The sinc filter is comprised of an
input summing junction 1930, the output thereof input through adelay block 1932 with a delay of z−1, the output thereof input to acoefficient block 1934, the output thereof providing the output of thesinc filter 552,coefficient block 1934 having the coefficient a0 associated therewith, this coefficient provided by thesinc control block 556. The output ofdelay block 1932 is also fed back to the input of summingjunction 1930 to provide the accumulation operation. Thisdelay block 1932 has a reset input associated therewith which is reset at a predetermined time. As noted hereinabove, this is a decimation type sinc filter. The output of both the low pass filter and the sinc filter are input to respective inputs of themultiplexer 554. This provides the u(n) error signal. The lowpass filter of the sinc filter can be selected, depending upon the particular application and the desire of the applications engineer. - Referring now to
FIGS. 20 a and 20 b, the frequency response of thePID 540 will be described. First, the mathematics associated with the PID will be set forth as follows:
It can be seen from the above equations that there is a single pole at DC and that there are two zeros. Further, it can be seen that the value of the zeros is the function of the constants Kp, Ki and Kd. By selecting these constants, the value of the zeros can be varied. - Referring now to
FIGS. 20 a and 20 b, there is illustrated frequency and phase plots for the response over frequency of the PID. It can be seen that there is a single pole at DC and the response will roll off until the first zero, at which time the response will flatten out until the second zero. At the second zero, the response changes in a positive manner, this due primarily to the differentiator term. However, it can be seen that without some type of filtering, the gain at high frequencies will be fairly high. This is the difference between a digital controller and an analog controller wherein the analog controller has an inherent low pass filter at the higher frequencies. It can be seen that the phase also exhibits a similar property wherein the phase is initially 90° and falls slightly to the first zero where it goes positive and then at the second zero continues to increase. At high frequencies, the phase is significantly leading in nature. With the use of a low pass filter, as set forth inFIG. 21 , the high frequency portion of the PID response can be controlled. However, the corner frequency of the low pass filter cannot be too low or the phase associated therewith will cause instability in the loop. Typically, the switching frequency is around 500 KHz. It will be desirable to filter any noise associated with the switching frequency and, therefore, it will be desirable from a filtering standpoint to move the corner frequency of the low pass filter at or below this frequency. However, this would cause significant phase instability in the control loop. This is where the sinc filter will be beneficial. The sinc filter, with the response shown inFIG. 22 , results in a plurality of “notches” at multiples of the sampling frequency, such that a notch can be placed at the switching frequency of the power supply. - As noted hereinabove, the sinc filter is a decimation type filter. The decimation ratio is defined as the ratio of the sampling frequency of the controller divided by the switching frequency of the power supply, the desired notch. If the sampling frequency fs, is set at 10 MHz and the switching frequency of the power supply, fsw, is equal to 500 kHz, that summation ratio would be equal to is fw, which results in zeros at integer multiples of the switching frequency. This is equal to (10×106)/(500×103), which results in a decimation ratio of 20. Therefore, a notch would exist at 500 kHz, 1 MHz, 1.5 MHz and finally at 5 MHz, fs/2. Therefore, the accumulator would accumulate 20 samples and then be reset, at which time it would provide an output.
- Referring now to
FIG. 23 , there is illustrated a more detailed implementational diagram of thedigital compensator 412. Theinput 1901 of the PID is input along three paths, as noted hereinabove. The proportional path utilizes amultiplier 2302 having one input connected to thenode 1901 and the other input thereof for receiving the digital value of Kp and providing on the output the result for input to a first summingjunction 2304. The integral path has amultiplier 2306 associated therewith having one input thereof connected to theinput 1901 and the other input thereof for multiplication with the output of an ANDgate 2308. One input of the AND gate is connected through an inverter node to an integrate hold enable signal, INTHLDEN, and the other input thereof connected to the Ki integral constant. The output ofmultiplier 2306 is fed to the input of a summingjunction 2308 for summing with the output of afeedback delay block 2310 which is operable to feedback the output from anode 2312. The output of the summingjunction 2308 is passed through asaturation block 2314 to anode 2312.Node 2312 is input to the other input of the summingjunction 2304. The output of summingjunction 2304 is input to a summingjunction 2316. The differentiator block has a summingnode 2318 for receiving on the one input thereof the value on thenode 1901 and on the other input thereof the value onnode 1901 delayed bydelay block 2320, this input to a negative input such that theblock 2318 is a difference block. The output of thedifference block 2318 is input to amultiplication block 2322 for multiplication of the output of the summingblock 2318 with the constant case Kd. The output ofmultiplication block 2322 is input to the summingblock 2316. The summingblock 2316 is input to a summingblock 2324, this operable to receive on the input thereof a programmable dither signal, generated by aprogrammable dither register 2326. By changing the value of this programmable dither, the value output by the summingjunction 2316 can be varied. - The output of the summing
junction 2324 comprises the PID output. This is input to the two filters. The low pass filter is configured with an ANDgate 2330, one input connected to the PID output and the other input thereof connected to the filter select signal, FILTERSEL-EAR. The output of the enablegate 2330 is input to a summingjunction 2332. The output of summingjunction 2332 is input to the input of a summingjunction 2334, the output thereof connected through asaturate block 2336 toanode 2338 for input to adelay block 2340, the output thereof connected to anode 2342.Node 2342 is input to one input of amultiplication block 2344, the other input thereof connected to the coefficient a1 for multiplication therewith. The output ofmultiplication block 2344 is passed through atruncation block 2346 to truncate the value output therefrom for input to the other input of the summingjunction 2334 on a negative input thereof to provide a subtraction operation with the summingjunction 2334. The output ofnode 2342 is also input through adelay block 2348 to the input of amultiplication block 2350 for multiplication with the a2 coefficient. The output ofmultiplication block 2350 is truncated with atruncation block 2352 for input to a negative input on the summingjunction 2332 such that a subtraction operation is performed by the summingjunction 2332. A summingjunction 2358 is operable to the sum of the output ofnode 2342 and the output ofnode 2338, the output thereof input to amultiplication block 2360 for multiplication with the a3 coefficient. The output ofmultiplication block 2360 is input to ablock 2362 for saturation of truncation and then to the input of themultiplexer 554. - The sinc filter is facilitated with an input selection AND
gate 2364 having one input connected to the PID output and the other input connected to the filter select signal, FILTERSEL. The output of thegate 2364, the enable gate, is input to one input of a summingjunction 2366, the output thereof connected through asaturate block 2368 to anode 2370.Node 2370 is connected through adelay block 2372 to an input of an ANDgate 2374. The output of ANDgate 2374 is input to the other input of the summingjunction 2366.Node 2370 is also input to amultiplication block 2376 for multiplication with the sinc filter coefficient, a0, the output thereof connected to a saturate andtruncation block 2378 for output to the other input of themultiplexer 554. - When the sinc filter is selected, a different clock signal is utilized for delaying the output. A
delay 2380 is provided on the output of themultiplexer 554. Amultiplexer 2382 selects the control signal for thedelay 2380 to adjust the delay thereof. This either can be the raw clock signal or the raw clock signal divided by a factor of “N,” with adivide block 2384. The clock signal is input to one input of themultiplexer 2380 and to the other input thereof through thedivide block 2384 to provide the divide down clock signal. The divide down clock signal also provides the second input to the enablegate 2374 through inverting node thereon. Thus, the divide ratio provides the “reset” for the accumulation operation, the accumulation operation operating at the filter clock rate. The divide down “N” ratio sets the number of accumulations that will be allowed to occur before the reset, at which time the data output will be provided. - Referring now to
FIG. 24 , there is illustrated a Bode plot of the digital compensator with a low pass filter. It can be seen that, at DC, there is a pole and the first zero of the PID occurs at Fz1 and the second zero occurs at Fz2. The response will increase at the second zero until the first pole of the low pass filter occurs, at Fp1, and the second pole occurs later at a pole Fp2. Thus, it can be seen that by moving the corner frequency of the low pass filter out from the switching frequency and the zeros of the PID, there will be some increase in the signal output by the PID. Of course, the two zeros of the PID could be identical and the two poles of the low pass filter could be closer together. - Referring now to
FIG. 25 , there is illustrated a frequency plot of the sinc filter operation in the frequency domain. It can be seen that, in this embodiment set forth hereinabove with respect to the example where the sampling frequency of the filter is 10 MHz and the switching frequency of the power supply is 500 kHz, there will be anotch 2502 placed proximate to the 500 kHz switching frequency. It is noted that this notch is programmable to the use of the coefficients utilized to realize the sinc filter, the decimation ratio, the sampling frequency and the switching frequency. By adjusting these values, the notch can be programmed for placement at the switching frequency of the power supply. This will result in a very quiet power supply, such that the switching frequency is effectively filtered out of the control loop. - Voltage Positioning
- Referring now to
FIG. 26 , there is illustrated a prior art voltage plot of the voltage output in the presence of positive and negative transients. The power supply is typically given some type of specification for the regulation, i.e., the regulation must be within predetermined limits. There is a high limit and a low limit. The reason that the voltage may go outside of the limits is due to ripple or due to transient responses. The ripple is typically very tightly controlled. However, transient current surges can cause the voltage to increase or decrease. InFIG. 26 , there are illustrated a positive transient and a negative transient. A positive transient will occur whenever a load is quickly removed from the output of the power supply and a negative transient will occur when a load is applied. When a load is applied, for example, there will be a large inrush of current. This current will have a tendency to pull the power supply voltage low and out of regulation shortly until it can be brought back into regulation. However, it may be that the current rush will pull the voltage down below a lower limit, thus falling outside of the specification. The way the prior art systems have accommodated this transient is to provide for a larger capacitor on the output node. This larger capacitor will tend to reduce the effect of the transient and maintain it within the limit. The problem with large capacitors is that they are expensive and large. There are two types of capacitors that can be utilized, ceramic capacitors or electrolytic capacitors. The ceramic capacitors have a relatively small equivalent series resistance (ESR), but they do not accommodate large capacitor values at economic costs. A typical value of a capacitor to accommodate transients would be 100 microfarads. For this size of a capacitor, a single discrete capacitor would typically utilize an electrolytic capacitor. However, these electrolytic capacitors have high ESRs. For any inductor current ripple, there would be a commensurate amount of power dissipated in the ESR of the capacitor. For DC voltages, there would be no dissipation, but, for even a small ripple, there would be some heating of the capacitor. This heating could cause failure of the capacitor, which is why ceramic capacitors are favored. Thus, even though the ceramic capacitor has a relatively small value, power supply manufacturers utilize a plurality of the power supply capacitors disposed in parallel. Thus, for large capacitors, there can be a large part count and, therefore, it is desirable to reduce this part count. - In the present disclosed embodiment, it is possible through the control of the
reference DAC 506 that is part of thereference generator 410, to be controlled to reposition the set point for the reference input to theADC 408. For situations where low current is present, well below the rated current of the power supply, it is anticipated that any transient would be a negative transient due to a sub increase in the load. Thus, the set point is positioned higher than median voltage and closer to the higher limit than the low limit. Thus, when a transient occurs, it has the full range between the high and low limit or substantially the full range, within which to pull the voltage down on the output of the power supply. This is illustrated inFIG. 27 a, wherein the regulated DC voltage is disposed proximate the high limit. When high current is present, the set point is disposed proximate to the lower limit of the power supply specifications. When the load is removed, which would be expected, then a positive transient would occur and, with the embodiment illustrated inFIG. 27 b, the transient can have a magnitude that his approximately equal to the difference between the high and low limits in the specification. - In order to appropriately set the value output by the
reference DAC 506, it is necessary to determine the current level and then set the reference voltage level accordingly.FIGS. 28 a and 28 b illustrate this aspect. For low currents, the voltage is positioned proximate the high limit and for the high currents, the voltage is positioned proximate the lower limit. Illustrated inFIG. 28 a is the current and 28 b is the output voltage position, i.e., the set point. Superimposed on the current in phantom at the low current level is a current transient 2802. This results in a transient in the voltage in the transient 2804 in voltage that is negative going. However, since the voltage is positioned proximate the high limit, this transient has more room than if it were disposed at the midpoint between the high and low limits. Very similarly, when the current is high, there is illustrated a negative current transient 2806 in phantom. This would result in the regulated voltage experiencing a high voltage transient 2808. It can be seen that, since the voltage is repositioned for the higher current, that more room is allowed for the voltage mediation. The result of utilizing the voltage positioning is that a smaller capacitor can be utilized on the output, which can significantly reduce the part count. - Referring now to
FIG. 29 , there is illustrated a flow chart for the voltage positioning operation. This is initiated at astart block 2902 and the proceeds to ablock 2904 to sense the current. The current is sensed with aHall effect sensor 460 which generates a voltage output proportional to the current, these being conventional devices. This current is sensed and input to one of analog inputs to the chip and converted to a digital voltage with theSAR ADC converter 660. This is stored in the associated SFR/LIM register and can be examined by thecore processor 602. Of course, any time the current exceeds the internal limit, this is accommodated by other circuitry. Once the current is sensed, then the value of VREF output by thereference DAC 506 is then set. This is set in accordance with a look-up table that can be stored in the memory or any other manner to set the values of the steps, including a simple algorithm. It could be that the voltage is positioned at three points, one when the voltage is above a threshold, one when it is below a threshold and one when it is between the thresholds. However, even finer graduations could be facilitated through the use of a look-up table. - Referring now to
FIG. 30 , there is illustrated a block diagram of a method for determining the total current. Hall sensors are fairly expensive and, therefore, a different technique is disclosed for measuring the currents and determining the change to the reference voltage to be made. As noted hereinabove with respect toFIG. 1 , there is provided a half bridgepower supply section 3002, which includes on the output side aseries inductor 3004. Associated with thisseries inductor 3004 is aninternal resistance 3006 with a resistive value. The current through theresistor 3006 is determined with acurrent detector 3008, which will be described in more detail hereinbelow. This provides the inductor current to theoutput node 3010 wherein the output voltage VO is provided. The output current, IOUT, is output therefrom. Disposed between this output node and ground is theload capacitor 3012, COUT. This has associated therewith aninternal resistance 3040. Acurrent detector 3014 is disposed between the bottom plate of thecapacitor 3012 and ground. The current detected by thecurrent source 3008 is multiplied by a gain factor and input to a summingjunction 3016. Similarly, the current detected by thecurrent detector 3014 is multiplied by a factor and input to the summingjunction 3016. In general, the ratio between the twointernal resistors junction 3016. The output of the summingjunction 3016 is an intermediate voltage VI. The output of each of the current detect legs after the amplification stage is provided by the following equations:
V I =V O +I L R ESRZ +I C R ESRZ
V I =V O +I OUT R ESRZ
The output of the summing junction is then input to a summingjunction 3018 to subtract the term IOUTRESR2 from the value of VREF to provide the error voltage. This is input to acontrol block 3020 for input to thehalf bridge 3002. This is one implementation, but it indicates that the current can be determined from looking at particular voltages associated with the operation of the inductor and the capacitor. Once the currents are known, then a factor can be determined, such as the voltage across the resistor, and this can be utilized to perform the voltage positioning. Alternatively, the absolute value of the current can be determined and a look-up table utilized. - Referring now to
FIG. 31 , there is illustrated a schematic of the technique for measuring the current across the resistor without utilizing a Hall sensor. This is facilitated by disposing a series RC network between one side of theinductor 3004 and the other side of theinternal resistor 3006. This is comprised of aresistor 3102 and acapacitor 3104 labeled RO and CO. This is a monitoring circuit. If, for example, VO were equal to “0,” then the following relationship would exist:
V 1 =I OUT(sL+R ESRZ)
By combining the last two equations, the following exists:
By matching the poles and zeros of the above function, i.e., setting ROCO=L/RESR1 or RORESR1C0=L, then IOUT=Bx/RESR1. The output of Vx is then equal to IOUT multiplied by the value of RESR1. - Referring now to
FIG. 32 , there is illustrated a diagrammatic view of the technique for determining the current through the capacitor. The capacitor is illustrated with anoutput capacitor 3202, the large filter output capacitor which has theinternal resistance 3204. By providing a parallel series RC component comprised of aseries resistor 3206 andseries capacitor 3208, it is possible to determine at a junction between theresistor 3206 and capacitor 3208 a voltage which represents the voltage acrossresistor 3206. This is scaled such that the voltage acrossresistor 3206 is correlated with the voltage acrossresistor 3204 and current therefrom can be measured. The relationship is as follows:
Thus, it can be seen that the voltage at the junction betweenresistor 3206 andcapacitor 3208 directly relates to the current through thecapacitor 3202. - Referring now to
FIG. 33 , there is illustrated an embodiment illustrating the current sensing of the inductor current and the capacitor current of the embodiments ofFIGS. 31 and 32 . The voltage Vx from the junction betweenresistor 3102 andcapacitor 3104 is input to one side of a summingjunction 3302, the other side connected to the output voltage VO. The voltage VCO from the junction betweenresistor 3206 andresistor 3208 is input to a summingjunction 3304. Both summingjunctions junction 3302 is normalized to RESR by multiplying by the function of RESR/R1, where R1 is the value ofresistor 3006. Thus, this output can be summed with a summingjunction 3306 with the output of summingjunction 3004 to provide the voltage Vi, the intermediate voltage. This represents the voltage across theresistor 3014, which can then be utilized to determine current, as this voltage represents the current IOUT through a resistor of a value RESR. From an implementation standpoint, the voltage VX on the junction betweenresistors pin 652 for input to themultiplexer 656. The VCO output at the junction betweenresistors resistor 3006 and theresistor 3014 in order to determine the current through the inductor and capacitor, respectively. The functions RESR/R1 is a constant that can be determined from known values and this utilized in the microcontroller to perform the operations of the summingjunctions - DPWM
- Referring now to
FIG. 34 , there is illustrated a general block diagram of theDPWM 416. As noted hereinabove, theDPWM 416 is a state machine that is operable to generate up to six phases for use in driving external drivers that will control switches on the switching power converter. Each of these phases will be defined by a leading edge and a trailing edge, either leading or trailing edge being rising or falling. Either the u(n) signal from thedigital compensator 412 or a microcontroller generated PID value from theregister 564 is provided on thebus 570 as an input to theDPWM 416. The original u(n) represents a number of clock cycles that the PHI output is turned on per frame. TheDPWM 416 provides for highly flexible operation, which is operable to accommodate various pulse width and phase modulation schemes. Phase-to-phase timing can be programmed for fixed (or zero) dead time, or themicrocontroller 440 can dynamically control dead time during converter operation. TheDPWM 416 may be clocked at 200 MHz (5 nS resolution) or 50 MHz (20 nS resolution), depending on the setting associated therewith, these clocks generated by the PLL. It is noted that the DPWM is a state machine, such that, for each clock cycle, there is a result output by the state machine, as compared to an instruction based microprocessor or a DSP solution. - There are provided two paths from the
input bus 570. The first path is associated with a SymmetryLock logic block 3402, which is operable to interface with a Symmetry Lock SFR in themicrocontroller 440. As noted hereinabove, there are a plurality of SFRs, some of which are not illustrated, each of these SFRs occupying a portion of the address space of themicrocontroller 440, such that they can be written to or read from. The SymmetryLock logic block 3402 is operable to latch each value output by themultiplexer 566 upon receiving a Data Ready signal. Since thedigital compensator 412 operates at a clock rate of 10 MHz with a switching frequency of 500 kHz, for example, there will be many more samples of u(n) during a particular switching frame than may be required. However, u(n) can be changing and there may be modulation schemes and phase schemes that require an edge of the pulse to be sent based upon current data. Theblock 3402 latches each value and, upon the occurrence of a predetermined lock condition, the data will be “locked” into thelogic block 3402. This situation occurs when, for example, the trailing edge of PH1 requires current data to determine the position thereof. Once the trailing edge occurs on PH1, a system may be set up that, for example, the leading edge of PH1, a relative edge to the trailing edge of PH1, calculates its position relative to PH1 based upon the locked data in thelogic block 3402. - There are provided two separate paths output from the
logic block 3402, a first path associated with asummation block 3404 and a second path associated with asummation block 3406. Each of the summation blocks 3404 and 3406 is operable to receive a 2's complement correction data value from a correction data SFR, labeled TLCD0 and TLCD1, respectively, which basically each provide an offset. There may be situations where the designer needs to compensate the mismatch of the components in the power supply. As such, it may be desirable to add an offset value increasing or decreasing the value of u(n). This would allow for the adjustment of dead time between two output phases. Once corrected, each of the paths flows to an associatedlimit block limit block 3408 is associated with thesummation block 3404 and receives high and low limits, TLGT0 and TLLT0, wherein thelimit block 3410 associated with thesummation block 3406 receives high and low limits TLGT1 and TLLT1, these limits associated with respective SFRs. By providing two correction paths for each Symmetry Lock logic block, this allows a first edge to be defined based upon currently changing data and then subjected to two different correction factors and two different limit factors. - There is provided a second Symmetry Lock logic path associated with a
logic block 3412, having associated therewith two paths associated with, in the first path, asummation block 3414 and thelimit block 3416. The second path has associated therewith asummation block 3418 and alimit block 3420. These blocks have associated correction data and associated high/low limit values. This will provide two additional corrected u(n) values which can both be locked. - Each of the four corrected u(n) values form the
blocks timing generator 3422 which generates the phase values for output to a timing generatorbypass logic block 3424. The length of a switching cycle can be defined by signal SWC_CYC and there is also provided via control of the microcontroller 440 a start of cycle signal DPWM_EN. The polarity of the initial pulse edge, rising or falling, is determined by PH_POL. - Referring now to
FIG. 35 , there is illustrated a more detailed block diagram of the Symmetry Lock logic circuit. When enabled, the two Symmetry Lock logic blocks 3402 and 3412 store the value of u(n) once per switching cycle at a time specified by aregister 3502, DPWMULOCK. The two latch u(n) values are paired with two trim and limit functions, resetting in four unique sorted u(n) functions, resulting in four unique corrected u(n) functions that can be mapped to any of the PHn outputs in any combination. The value of u(n) on thedata bus 570 is input to a data input of twolatches latch 3504 is connected to the output of a leading/trailing edgeselect block 3508 which is controlled by the bit ULCK0_EDG bit of theregister 3502. This is operable to select either the leading or trailing edge of one of the six phases PH1-PH6 that are selected by amultiplexer 3510. This is controlled by the first three bits of theregister 3502. As noted, the latch is operable to latch each value of the u(n) data therein. The output of thelatch 3504 is input to the trim and limit blocks 3512 and 3514, associated with theblocks FIG. 34 . Similarly, there is provided in the second Symmetry Lock logic path amultiplexer 3516 controlled by the bits 4-6 ofregister 3502 for selecting one of the six phases and inputting that to a leading/trailing edgeselect block 3518, the output thereof driving the clock input of thelatch 3506. Thelatch 3506 is associated with two trim andlimit blocks blocks - The
timing generator 3422 is comprised of a plurality of multiplexers and phase generators. Each path has amultiplexer 3526 associated therewith and aphase generator 3528, each of these being a pattern generator. Eachmultiplexer 3526 is operable to receive all four of the corrected u(n) values and, depending upon which one is mapped to the particular phase path, input that to the associatedpattern generator 3528. The corrected u(n) values are mapped to one of the PHn outputs in any combination using the PHn_CNTL0 registers in thetiming generator 3422. Thepattern generators 3528 independently generate the PHn outputs responsive to the corrected u(n) values and the PHN_CNTL0 register values. This enables positive, negative or system management processor controlled dead times between the outputs which will be more filly discussed below. Each PHn output has itsown pattern generator 3528 which may be programmed to be modulated by any u(n) value. - Referring now to
FIG. 36 , there is illustrated a more detailed diagram of the trim and limit sub-system, illustrating the registers and how they interface with various function blocks. The trim and limit sub-system enables the system management processor to set minimum and maximum limits and or bias each u(n). The u(n) output of thesymmetry lock logic 3402 is applied to a two'scomplement adders complement adders max logic multiplexer 3630 is operable to be disposed between each of the outputs of thelimiters multiplexer 3630 is illustrated as a single multiplexer, there is actually a separate multiplexer for each cu(n) output. - Referring now to
FIG. 37 , there is illustrated a more detailed block diagram of thepattern generator 3528 for one of the phases. The timing of each PHn output is controlled by the programmed settings in the control registers PHN_CNTL0 through PHn_CNTL3. Each phase output is allowed to have a maximum of two transitions per switching cycle. Programming the DPWM consists of initializing the control registers, then programming the leading and trailing edge control registers for each PHn output that is used in the application. In this way, the dead times between control signals of complementary switches may be programmed using thepattern generators 3528 as described below. Each of the phase generators is divided into two sections, one for processing the leading edge and one for processing a trailing edge. As will be described hereinbelow, each phase generator is based upon a leading or trailing edge. It is the generation and positioning of this edge that is handled by the state machine. Each edge is associated with a specific timing type. The timing type is an absolute time, wherein edge is defined as one that unconditionally occurs at a specific time-tick. Relative time is associated with an edge that occurs a prescribed time after its reference edge transitions. For example, normally PH1 has a leading edge that occurs at time-tick # 1 with a pulse width that is defined as a finite value of the u(n). The leading edge of PH2 is a relative edge, in some power converters, wherein the leading edge thereof occurs a number of time-ticks after the falling edge of PH1. Another is hardware modulation timing, which is associated with an edge that occurs at a time specified by the value of one of the four corrected u(n) modulation terms. - Each of the leading edge and trailing edge functionalities have associated therewith a portion of the
multiplexer 3526. The leading edge portion has amultiplexer 3702 associated therewith which is operable to select one of the four corrected u(n) values, or a “relative” or a “absolute” input. These inputs are provided by the PHn_CNTL as one register for the lowermost eight bits and a ninth bit from the PHn_CNTL0 register. These are SFR control registers. This provides a leading edge control value for the leading edge portion. Configuration data is provided that is the select input to themultiplexer 3702 and is provided by the three lowermost bits of a PHn_CNTL0 SFR. The information in these three bits is also input, along with the output of themultiplexer 3702, to a phasebit logic block 3704 that is operable to carry out the operations associated with defining the leading edge and defining the trailing edge. Thus, a control value is what is provided by themultiplexer 3702. The reference phases are provided bymultiplexer 3706 that selects between one of the six phases as a reference phase in the event that this is a relative edge created. This multiplexer is controlled by the four lowermost bits of the PHn_CNTL0 SFR. - The trailing edge is handled in a similar manner to the leading edge in that a
multiplexer 3710 is provided for receiving the four corrected u(n) values and also Relative and Absolute inputs from the PHn_CNTL3 control register and the eighth bit from the PHn_CNTL2 register. This provides a trailing edge control. Amultiplexer 3712, similar to themultiplexer 3706, selects one of the PH1-PH6 phases as the reference phase when a relative edge is being generated, and this is controlled by the four lowermost bits of the PHn_CNTL2 register. - The contents of the PHn_CNTL0 and CNTL2 registers is set forth in Tables 1 and 2.
TABLE 1 PHn_CNTL0: Phase n Leading Edge Control Register 0Bit 7PHnL(8): PHn Leading Edge Timing Data Bit 8This is bit 9 (MSB) of the PHn_CNTL1 register Bit 6-4 PHnL_SEL2 - 0: Phase 3 Leading Edge Control Bits000: PHn Leading Edge Timing Determined by u(n)0 001: PHn Leading Edge Timing Determined by u(n)1 010: PHn Leading Edge Timing Determined by u(n)2 011: PHn Leading Edge Timing Determined by u(n)3 100: PHn Leading Edge Timing is Relative to Another Timing Edge 101: PHn Leading Edge Timing is Relative to Another Timing Edge 110: PHn Leading Edge Timing is Relative to Another Timing Edge 111: PHn Leading Edge Timing is Absolute Bit 3 PHnL_EDGE: Relative Training Reference Edge Leading/ Trailing Edge Select 0: Relative Timing is Referenced to Leading Edge 1: Relative Timing is Referenced to Trailing Edge Bit 2-0 PhnL_PHn - 0: PHn Leading Edge Relative Timing Reference Edge 001: PHn Leading Edge Timing Relative to PH1 010: PHn Leading Edge Timing Relative to PH2 011: PHn Leading Edge Timing Relative to PH3 100: PHn Leading Edge Timing Relative to PH4 101: PHn Leading Edge Timing Relative to PH5 110: PHn Leading Edge Timing Relative to PH6 -
TABLE 2 PHn_CNTL2: Phase n Trailing Edge Control Register 2Bit 7PHnT(8): PHn Trailing Edge Timing Data Bit 8This is bit 9 (MSB) of the PHn_CNTL1 register Bit 6-4 PHnT_SELn - 0: Phase 2 Trailing Edge Control Bits000: PHn Trailing Edge Timing Determined by u(n)0 001: PHn Trailing Edge Timing Determined by u(n)1 010: PHn Trailing Edge Timing Determined by u(n)2 011: PHn Trailing Edge Timing Determined by u(n)3 100: PHn Trailing Edge Timing is Relative to Another Timing Edge 101: PHn Trailing Edge Timing is Relative to Another Timing Edge 110: PHn Trailing Edge Timing is Relative to Another Timing Edge 111: PHn Trailing Edge Timing is Absolute Bit 3 PHnT_EDGE: Relative Training Reference Edge Leading/ Trailing Edge Select 0: Relative Timing is Referenced to Leading Edge 1: Relative Timing is Referenced to Trailing Edge Bit 2-0 PHnT_PHn - 0: PHn Trailing Edge Relative Timing Reference Edge 001: PHn Trailing Edge Timing Relative to PH1 010: PHn Trailing Edge Timing Relative to PH2 011: PHn Trailing Edge Timing Relative to PH3 100: PHn Trailing Edge Timing Relative to PH4 101: PHn Trailing Edge Timing Relative to PH5 110: PHn Trailing Edge Timing Relative to PH6 - Referring now to
FIG. 38 , there is illustrated a diagrammatic view of thebypass logic block 3424. The bypass logic is operable to safeguard the power supply system by forcing each PH output into user-defined “safe” states during supply shutdown. The embodiment ofFIG. 38 shows the bypass logic for each phase. Anoutput multiplexer 3802 is operable to select, on one input, the output of theDPWM pattern generator 3422, the default output, or one of three static pre-defined states contained in the Software Bypass (SWBP_OUT)SFR 3806, the over-current protection fault (OCP_OUT)SFR 3808, or the Enable (ENABX_OUT)bypass SFR 3810. Therefore, the three shutdown sources, in priority, are the enable input, the over-current protection fault and the software bypass (noting that the software bypass is initiated by the microcontroller 440). Both the ENABLE input and the OCP are hardware shutdowns and are enabled by setting a bit in the DPWMCN register to a logic “1” which bit is the HWBP_EN bit. When enabled, a supply shutdown occurs when either the enable input pin is forced to its off state or the over-current protection interrupt (OCPIRQ) interrupts are asserted. If both occur simultaneously, the higher priority ENABLE interrupt will prevail. The lowest priority shutdown source is software bypass, which is invoked by themicrocontroller 440 by setting an SWBP bit in the DPWMCN register to a logic “1.” This is all facilitated with apriority encoder 3812 wherein the DPWMCN SFR is connected to the highest priority input through an ANDgate 3814 on one input thereof, the ENABIRQ interrupt connected to the other input. The DPWMCN HWBP_EN bit is also input to one input of an ANDgate 3816, which has the output thereof connected to the second priority input, with the other input of ANDgate 3816 connected to the OCPIRQ interrupt. The SWBP bit of the DPWMCN register is connected to one input of an ANDgate 3818, the output thereof connected to the lowest priority input of theencoder 3812, the other inputs of the ANDgate 3818 connected to the SVWBP_PHnEN bit associated with the particular phase. The transition from DPWM output to any of the three-defined states can be programmed to occur on switching frame boundaries, or instantaneously by setting the EMGY_EN bit of the DPWMCN register to a “1.” This is input to a control input of amultiplexer 3820, which selects either the direct output of thepriority encoder 3812 or the output of an end-of-frame synchronizer block 3824 disposed between the other input ofmultiplexer 3820 and the output of thepriority encoder 3812. Theframe synchronizer block 3824 is controlled by the EOFIRQ, the end-of-frame interrupt. For this end-of-frame synchronizing, this indicates that all operations, the generation of all leading and trailing edges for all phases, will occur prior to the bypass mode. With the use of the bypass safeguards, the state of each of the phases can be predetermined. In this manner, it can be insured that a transistor will not be closed and power being directed toward an inductor to basically destroy the transistor or other parts of the power converter. - Referring now to
FIG. 39 , there is illustrated a timing diagram depicting the Sync Mode of operation. This mode allows the start of each switching cycle to be synchronized with an external clock. The user enables sync mode by assigning the SYNC input to the port I/O pins by setting a sync enable signal, SYNCEN, in the XBARO SFR and the SYNC_EN bit in the DPWMCN to a logic “1.” A logic level sync pulse is applied to the SYNC input of the integrated circuit, the positive edge of which triggers (or re-triggers) the start of a new switching operation, shown inFIG. 39 . It can be seen that when the SYNC input goes high, at anedge 3902, the switching cycle will terminate. The SYNC pulse must return low a minimum of three clock cycles of the DPWM prior to the next positive transition, as illustrated in the associated detail. The switching cycle in execution is unconditionally terminated and the new switching cycle initiated on thepositive edge 3902 of the SYNC pulse. In non-sync mode, SWC_CYC in SFR register defines the switching cycle period. - Referring now to
FIG. 40 , there is illustrated a timing diagram for the operation of frame skipping, withFIG. 41 illustrating a detail of the bypass operation ofFIG. 38 . In the illustration ofFIG. 41 , the SWBP_PHnEN bit of the SWBP_OUTEN SFR is input to one input of an ANDgate 4102, the other input thereof connected to the SWBP bit of the DPWMCN register. For frame skipping, even at a minimum PWM duty cycle, system losses at minimum may be insufficient to prevent VOUT from rising above its specified maximum. Frame skipping reduces the effect of energy transferred to the load by momentarily shutting the supply output off on alternate cycles. It is analogous to pure skipping, but applies to all PH outputs. In reference to the timing diagram ofFIG. 40 , it can be seen that each PHn bit has a corresponding PHn enable bit in SWBP_OUTEN and a SWBP bit in SWBP_OUT. The end-of-frame interrupt interrupts themicrocontroller 440 at the end of each switching cycle. When this occurs, themicrocontroller 440 will clear the SWBP bit in DPWMCN register, forcing theoutput multiplexer 3802 for each PH output to pass either the DPWM output (active switching cycle), or the OFF state contained in SWBP_OUT. Frame skipping can be configured to skip any number of cycles. Normal (continuous active frame) load resumes when firmware detects an increase in output loading. - Referring now to
FIG. 42 , there is illustrated a flow chart depicting the operation of creating an edge in a driving pulse in the pattern generator. Each edge is created similar to another edge by this procedure, such that the pattern generator is operable to operate on edges, such that all that needs to be defined by the power supply designer is the parameters of an edge, whether it is an absolute edge, a relative edge, how many ticks to wait before generating the edge, whether it is a leading edge or a trailing edge and whether it is falling or rising. The program is initiated at ablock 4202 wherein the referenced edge is selected in the appropriate phase, i.e., either the leading edge or the trailing edge. The program then flows to adecision block 4204 to determine if it is an absolute edge. An absolute edge, as described hereinabove, is one that has a defined starting point from the edge of the initiation of the flame. If so, the program flows along the “Y” path to afunction block 4206 to reset the base to a value of “0.” If it is not an absolute edge, then the program flows along the “N” path to afunction block 4208 to monitor for the reference edge, i.e., to determine when the reference edge has occurred. This program flows to adecision block 4210 to determine if it has been triggered and it will maintain itself in a loop until such time, at which time it will flow along the “Y” path to afunction block 4212 to latch the value of the DPWM counter as the base value. This basically sets the reference edge as the base. The program then flows to adecision block 4214 to determine if the corrected value of u(n) is selected. This is also the point in the program to which thefunction block 4206 flows. If the corrected u(n) is selected, the program flows along the “Y” path to afunction block 4216 to select the corrected u(n) as the operand. If not, the program flows along the “N” path to afunction block 4218 to select the value from the SFR register as the operand, this being a fixed value. Bothfunction blocks function block 4220 to set the expected value equal to the base value plus the value of the operand. The program then flows to afunction block 4222 wherein the result is compared with the DPWM counter value. Adecision block 4224 determines when the expected value is greater than or equal to the DPWM counter value, at which time it will flow along a “N” path to afunction block 4226 to trigger the edge, i.e., create the edge. The program then flows to afunction block 4228 to monitor for the end of frame interrupt and, if it occurs, the program will flow from adecision block 4230 along a “Y” path to afunction block 4232 in order to reset the edge and the state machine, at which time the program will flow back to the input offunction block 4202. - Referring now to
FIG. 43 , there is illustrated a flow chart depicting the operation of selecting the value of u(n) from either the PID or the SFR. The program is initiated at ablock 4302 and then proceeds to ablock 4304 to monitor if the corrected u(n) value is ready for latching. As described hereinabove, the data is ready after it has been processed through the conversion cycle of the ADC and then passes through the digital compensator. At the digital compensator, for example, the sinc filter may take longer to process due to the decimation aspect thereof. The program then flows to adecision block 4306 to determine if a new u(n) is ready and, if not, it loops back tofunction block 4304. When ready, the program flows to adecision block 4308 to determine if the Symmetry Lock edge has been triggered such that Symmetry Lock is present. If so, this indicates that the new u(n) should not be processed and the program flows back to the input of thefunction block 4304. If not, the program then flows to afunction block 4310 to latch the new u(n) into the register and then to afunction block 4312 to correct the value of u(n) by the offset to provide a corrected value thereof. The program then flows to adecision block 4314 to determine if a corrected value of u(n) is less than the minimum limit and, if so, then it flows to afunction block 4316 to set the corrected value of u(n) to the minimum limit. If not, then the program flows to adecision block 4318 to determine if the corrected value of u(n) is greater than the maximum and, if so, the program flows to afunction block 4320 to set the corrected value of u(n) to the maximum limit. If neither limit has been breached, the program flows to afunction block 4322 to leave the corrected value of u(n) unchanged and then to adecision block 4324 to determine if the ICYC interrupt has occurred. If so, the program flows to afunction block 4326 to set the corrected value of u(n) to “0” and, if the interrupt has not occurred, the program flows to afunction block 4328 to leave the corrected value of u(n) unchanged. - Referring now to
FIG. 44 a, there is more fully illustrated the over current protection circuitry 4400 of the digital pulsewidth modulator circuit 416 contained within block 446 (FIG. 4 ). The over current protection circuitry 4400 has provided thereto a voltage related to the output current IPK of thebuck converter 402. The output current IPK is measured via a hall sensor which provides the measured current output. The voltage related to the output current IPK is provided to the positive input of acomparator 4402 viainput line 4404. Theswitch 4406 on theinput line 4404 is associated with the leading edgeblanker circuit 4408 which will be more fully discussed herein below. The negative input of thecomparator 4402 is connected to the output of a 4-bit programmable digital to analog controller (DAC) 4410. The 4-bitprogrammable DAC 4410 provides a voltage related to the threshold current ITH to the negative input ofcomparator 4402. The 4-bitprogrammable DAC 4410 is programmed to provide a desired threshold by acontrol register 4412 having a control value stored therein. Thecomparator 4402 compares the provided voltage related to the output current IPK of thebuck converter 402 with the programmed voltage related to the threshold current ITH and when the voltage related to IPK exceeds the voltage related to the threshold current ITH, a primary interrupt (ICYCIRQ) is generated online 4414 from the output ofcomparator 4402. The value to which the voltage related to the ITH current is programmed by the digital toanalog controller 4410 is based upon the limits of thebuck converter 402 to which the DPWM is connected. Hysteresis for thecomparator 4402 is controlled from hysteresis control values from acontrol register 4416. The primary interrupt (ICYCIRQ) is provided to a clock input of 5-bit counter 4418. The primary interrupt (OCYCIRQ) is also provided to the input ofreset logic 4420. The primary interrupt is output vialine 4422 to theDPWM 416, thecontroller 440 and to the integrator stage of thePID 540. - The 5-
bit control register 4418 monitors the number of occurrences of the primary interrupt. The present count for the number of occurrences is provided as an output online 4424. The present primary interrupt count is stored within acontrol register 4426 called ICYC count. The present ICYC count online 4424 is compared at acomparator 4428 with an over current protection count limit provided fromregister 4430. The OCP current limit comprises the maximum number of occurrences of primary interrupt ICYCIRQ in consecutive frames that may occur. The present ICYC count from the 5-bit counter 4418 is compared with the OCP count limit, which is stored inregister 4430, atcomparator 4428, and if the ICYC count from the 5-bit counter 4418 equals the OCP count limit, a secondary interrupt OCPIRQ is generated from thecomparator 4428 onoutput line 4432. The secondary over current interrupt is provided to theDPWM 416 to indicate the occurrence of a serious over current condition. - The primary over protection interrupt ICYCIRQ provides an indication of over current conditions which may or may not fix themselves in a next frame period. The occurrence of consecutive primary interrupt conditions are monitored by the 5-
bit counter 4418 such that when a predetermined number of primary interrupts have occurred, the secondary interrupt OCPIRQ may be generated to indicate a more serious over current problem such as a dead short. The primary interrupt ICYCIRQ performs a number off functions within the switch power supply device described with respect toFIG. 1 . The primary interrupt ICYCIRQ is provided to theDPWM 416 such that each of the switches connected to the phase outputs of theDPWM 416 are turned off. Additionally, the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ is provided to thePID 540 to hold the integrator to prevent it from overloading. - Reffering now to
FIG. 44 b, there is illustrated the circuit for providing the integrated hold to thePID 540. The primary interrupt ICYCIRQ is applied to a first input of ORgate 4470. The second input of ORgate 4470 is connected to the integrator hold output from alatch 4472. The output comprises the Q output of thelatch 4472. The output ofOR gate 4470 is applied to an input of ANDgate 4474. The other input of ANDgate 4474 is an inverted input of the end of frame interrupt EOFIRQ. The output of ANDgate 4474 is connected to the D input oflatch 4472. A clock signal PWMCK is applied to the clock input of thelatch 4472. -
FIG. 44 c describes the operation of the circuit ofFIG. 44 b. Atstep 4480, the integrator hold circuit monitors for the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ.Inquiry step 4482 determines if the ICYCIRQ interrupt has been detected. If not, control passes back tostep 4480. Once the primary interrupt is detected, the integrator hold circuit is initiated atstep 4484. Once the integrator hold circuit has been initiated,inquiry step 4486 determines if the end of frame interrupt has been received. If not, the integrator hold circuit remains active atstep 4484. Once the end of frame interrupt is detected, the integrator hold circuit is released atstep 4488. - This is more fully illustrated in
FIG. 45 where there is shown thepulsed output 4502 associated with PH X which could be any phase outputs of theDPWM 416, and the primary interrupt signal ICYCIRQ provided from the output of thecomparator 4402.FIG. 45 illustrates three separate frame periods. Occurring from times T0 to T1 is afirst frame 4506 a, from time T1 to time T2 is asecond frame 4506 b and from time period T2 to time period T3 is athird frame 4506 c. Duringtime frame 4506 a, a switch connected to the output of PH X would be turned on by the risingpulse edge 4508. Upon detection of a pulse indicating a primary interrupt at risingedge 4510, the switch connected with output PH X would be turned off by the signal being driven low at 4512 by theDPWM 416. Likewise, inframe 4506 b, the switch associated with DPWM output PH X would be turned on at 4514 and turned off at 4516 responsive to detection of the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ at 4518. The turning off of a switch in response to detection of the ICYC interrupt occurs similarly inframe 4506 c. - If the over current condition continues over multiple frames and the secondary interrupt OCPIRQ is generated, this signal is provided to the
DPWM 416 which then has the option of immediately stopping operation of the DPWM upon receipt of the secondary interrupt OCPIRQ, or alternatively, may wait to cease operation of the DPWM at the end of the next frame. Whether the DPWM ceases operation right away or at the end of the frame is programmable by the user. - Referring now back to
FIG. 44 a, thereset logic 4422 is responsive to the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ and the end of frame interrupt EOFIRQ provided from theDPWM 416 to reset the 5-bit counter to “0” when pulses of the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ are no longer received in consecutive frames. Thus, if thereset logic 4420 within a previous frame has detected occurrence of a primary interrupt ICYCIRQ, and in the next frame, as indicated by the occurrence of the end of frame interrupt EOFIRQ, there is detected no occurrence of the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ, thereset logic 4420 provides a signal to the reset input of the 5-bit counter 4418 vialine 4440 to reset the 5-bit counter to “0.” The end of frame interrupt EOFIRQ is additionally provided as an input to the 5-bit counter 4418. This enables the 5-bit counter to only count a single occurrence of the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ within a particular frame. If the 5-bit counter 4418 had already counted the occurrence of a primary interrupt ICYCIRQ during a single frame period and receives a second primary interrupt pulse, thecounter 4418 will not count this pulse since the counter had not received an end of frame interrupt since receiving the last ICYCIRQ primary interrupt. - The leading edge
blanker circuit 4408 mentioned herein above receives an input from the leading edge blankerselect register 4442. The leading edge blankerselect register 4442 provides a control input for actuating or not actuating the leading edgeblanker circuit 4408. The leading edge blankerselect register 4442 also provides an indication to thephase selector 4443 of the phase output of theDPWM 416 that is to be blanked. Thephase selector 4443 is connected to receive each of the PH1-PH6 outputs of theDPWM 416, such that the leading edge blanker circuit may know when to actuate a leading edge blanker output viaoutput 4444 to switch 4406 corresponding to a leading edge on one of these phase outputs. The leading edge blankerselect register 4442 also provides the length of the blanking time of the blanking pulse. Additionally, the leading edgeblanker circuit 4408 receives an input from the end of frame interrupt EOFIRQ to indicate when a frame has ended. This enables the leading edgeblanker circuit 4408 to know when to begin looking for a next leading edge pulse. Finally, the PWMCK is a clock input clocking operations of the leading edgeblanker circuit 4408. The output of the leading edgeblanker circuit 4408 is provided to switch 4406 to provide an open switch condition atswitch 4406 to keep the input of thecomparator 4402 from seeing a spiked current output on the IPK line. This is more fully illustrated inFIG. 46 . -
FIG. 46 illustrates the output of one of thephase outputs 4602 from theDPWM 416, theoutput current IPK 4604 and theblanking signal 4606. Within afirst frame 4608, the phase output of one of the outputs of theDPWM circuit 416 goes high at 4610. This comprises the leading edge of this switching pulse. In response to theoutput 4602 going high at 4610, acurrent spike 4612 due to parasitic capacitance is created at the current output IPK. If the voltage related to thecurrent spike 4612 were applied to the input of thecomparator 4402, thecomparator 4402 might inadvertently register an over current condition responsive to the current spike even though no over current condition actually existed. A blanking pulse is provided from the leading edgeblanker circuit 4408 via theoutput 4444 to the blankingswitch 4406 to set the switch to an open condition to keep thecomparator 4402 from monitoring the current spike on IPK. Thecurrent blanking pulse 4614 will only open the blankingswitch 4406 during the time ofcurrent spike 4612. The remainder of the time the switch is closed enabling thecomparator 4402 to compare the output current to the threshold current. The operation of theblanking signal 4606 in thefollowing frame 4616 occurs in a similar fashion. The phase blanked by the leading edgeblanker circuit 4408 and the length of the blankingpulse 4614 are each programmable by the user through the LEBselect register 4442. Theblanking circuit 4408 may also detect a falling edge signal that comprises a leading edge signal. - Referring now to
FIG. 47 , there is illustrated a flow diagram describing the operation of the over current protection circuitry in the manner for generating both the primary interrupt ICYCIRQ and the secondary interrupt OCPIRQ. The leading edge blanker circuit initially monitors atstep 4702 the output current IPK. The output current IPK is compared atstep 4704 with the threshold current ITH to determine whether the output current exceeds the threshold current. Ifinquiry step 4706 determines that the output current does not exceed the threshold current, control passes back tomonitoring step 4702. - Once the
inquiry step 4706 determines that the output current has exceeded the threshold current, a primary interrupt ICYCIRQ is generated atstep 4708.Inquiry step 4710 determines if the interrupt is occurring within a new frame. If not, control passes back tomonitoring step 4702 to continue to monitor for the occurrence of a primary interrupt in a new frame. Ifinquiry step 4710 determines that the primary interrupt has occurred within a new frame, the interrupt count is incremented atstep 4710. - Next, at
inquiry step 4714, a determination is made if the interrupt count has reached the count limit. If not, control returns to monitoringstep 4702 to begin monitoring for a next interrupt pulse. If the interrupt count limit has been equaled, a secondary interrupt OCPIRQ is generated atstep 4716. Thecontroller 440 will reset the OCPIRQ when the OCP condition is removed, and process flow returns to monitoringstep 4702 to continue monitoring the output current. - Referring now to
FIG. 48 , there is illustrated the process of operation of thereset logic 4420. Thereset logic 4420 monitors atstep 4802 the occurrence of the primary interrupt from thecomparator 4402. Ifinquiry step 4804 detects an interrupt, control passes back tomonitoring step 4802. If no interrupt is detected,inquiry step 4806 determines if an end of frame interrupt has been received by thereset logic 4420. If no end of frame interrupt has been received, control passes back to step 4802 to continue monitoring the primary interrupt output. Wheninquiry step 4806 detects an occurrence of an end of frame interrupt and no primary interrupt has been detected within that frame, thecounter 4418 is reset atstep 4808. Control then returns to monitoringstep 4802 to repeat the process. - Referring now to
FIG. 49 , there is illustrated the circuitry for providing both over voltage and temperature protection for theDPWM 416 contained within block 446 (FIG. 4 ). A number of analog signals are applied to the input of amultiplexor 4902. These signals are provided from various analog outputs and include a VSENSE input sensing the output voltage of the switched power supply and an AINO/VIN input which is monitoring the input voltage of the switched power supply. Also, a TEMP signal is provided by atemperature sensor 4904 that measures the temperature of the device. These signals are multiplexed to theoutput 4906 of themultiplexor 4902 and provided to the input of a 12 bit analog to digital converter (ADC) 4910. The 12bit ADC 4910 is controlled from values from anADC control register 4912. The output of the 12 bit ADC is a digital output which is applied to the input of a special function register/limit (SFR/LIM) register set. There are a number of SFR/LIM register sets associated with output of theADC 4910. Each of the SFR/LIM register sets are associated with one of the input analog signals provided to themultiplexor 4902. The SFR/LIM register sets have stored therein a limit value. The SFR/LIM register set compares a provided input from theADC 4910 to this limit value, and if the limit value is exceeded, generates an associated interrupt signal at the output of the SFR/LIM register set. - Thus, when the VSENSE signal is applied to the input of the 12
bit ADC 4910, a digital VSENSE signal is applied to the input of SFR/LIM register set 4920. The SFR/LIM register set 4920 compares the provided digital value of VSENSE to the predetermined value stored within theregister set 4920. If the provided value exceeds the stored value, a VSENSEIRQ is generated atoutput 4922. If the provided value does not exceed the stored limit value inregister set 4920, no VSENSEIRQ is generated. Likewise, if the VIN value is applied to the input of the 12bit ADC 4910, the digitized value is applied to the input of SFR/LIM 4924. If the provided digital value of the VIN exceeds the stored limit value in theregister set 4924, a AIN0/VINRQ is generated atoutput 4926. The remaining SFR/LIM register sets operate in a similar manner responsive to a digital input that is compared to a limit value stored within the register set. When the limit value is exceeded an appropriate interrupt is generated. - When the temperature value is applied to the input of 12
bit ADC 4910, the digitized temperature signal is applied to the input of the TEMP SFR/LIM register set 4930. As described previously, this value is compared with a temperature limit value in theregister set 4930, and if this value is exceeded, a TEMPIRQ is generated atoutput 4932. However, the output of the TEMP SFR/LIM register set 4930 is connected to the input of anOR gate 4934. This is due to the fact that not enough interrupt resources are available for each of the SFR/LIM register set, so a limited number of the register sets have their outputs applied to the input of ORgate 4934. The interrupt provided to the input of ORgate 4934 is also provided at theoutput 4936 ofOR gate 4934. Thus, when the TEMP's IRQ is applied toinput 4932, it will also be provided at theoutput pin 4936. When a digital value is applied to a particular SFR/LIM register set, the remaining SFR/LIM register sets are each disabled. Thus, when a digital signal associated with a particular register set is being applied, that register set is the only register set which is presently enabled. - Referring now to
FIG. 50 , there is more fully illustrated the process of operation of the SFR/LIM register sets. Initially, atstep 5002 each of the VSENSE input voltage, the input voltage VIN and the temperature are monitored by the above-described circuitry. When a particular SFR/LIM register set determines atinquiry step 5004 that a limit value has been exceeded, the interrupt is generated atstep 5006. Ifinquiry step 5004 determines that no value has been exceeded, control passes back to themonitoring step 5002. Once the interrupt 5006 has been generated and provided to thecontroller 440 of the switched power supply, the controller will access atstep 5008 the special function register set to determine what the present problem may be. - Referring now to
FIG. 51 , there is illustrated a block diagram of the PLL block. The reference phase, i.e., an external or internally generated signal, is received on aninput 5102 and input to one input of a phase-frequency detector 5104. The output of this is input to acharge pump circuit 5106 which is operable to charge a node from a positive sourcing circuit or to discharge the node to a sinking circuit. This is conventional. The output of thecharge pump circuit 5106 is input to aloop filter 5108 to generate a control voltage for a voltage controlled oscillator (VCO) 5110. This output is provided as the upper level frequency of, in this example, 400 MHz. This is input to one input of amultiplexer 5112. This is then output to a divide-by-twocircuit 5114, which provides on the output a 200 MHz clock, this being the preferred DPWM clock. The output ofblock 5114 is then input to another divide-by-twocircuit 5116 to provide a 100 MHz clock signal, which is typically unused, which is then output to a third divide-by-twocircuit 5120, which provides a 50 MHz output and then to a divide-by-twoblock 5122 to provide on the output thereof a 25 MHz signal for input to the other input of the phase-frequency detector 5104. This PLL provides the 200 MHz clock for the DPWM clock. The filter clock is provided by dividing this by a factor of 20. - In an alternate operation, there is a test mode provided wherein the
input 5102 is input to the other input of amultiplexer 5112 for bypassing the PLL operation in the blocks 5104-5110. This allows the dividers to be directly controlled and the frequency of operations to be controlled also. - Dead Time
- Referring now to
FIGS. 52 a-52 d, there is illustrated the manner in which the dead time between two switching control signals may be controlled using the programmability of the pattern generators and a corrected signal u(n) from the trim and limit circuitry.FIG. 52 a illustrates a prior art configuration wherein first and second control signals for complementary switches within a power supply are both turned off from a time period between time t2 and time t3. The rising edge at t3 is determined with respect to the falling edge at t2. This time period is referred to as the dead time (DT). Within prior art analog control systems, this dead time is adjustable only as to controlling a delay between the generation of the trailing edge of φ1 and the leading edge of φ2, but the trailing edge of φ2 referenced to the beginning of the switching cycle can never occur prior to the trailing edge of φ1. However, utilizing the DPWM controller described hereinabove with respect toFIGS. 34-37 , a microprocessor may program the output of the two phase control outputs to enable the dead time between times t2 and t3 to be increased, decreased, or even made negative. - Referring now to
FIG. 52 b, there is illustrated a situation wherein the trailing edge of a first control signal φ1 is generated responsive to a corrected signal u(n). In response to the signal u(n)1, the control signal φ1 goes low at time t2, this occurring when the correct value of the master counter for the DPWM equals u(n)1. The leading edge of the control signal φ2 is responsive to the corrected signal C(u(n)) which equals u(n) plus some offset value set by the trim and limit amount. The leading edge of control signal φ2 is programmed responsive to its associated control registers and the corrected u(n) signal such that it will have its leading edge go high when u(n) plus or minus some value x equals the count value of the master DPWM counter at time t3. Thus, for example, the leading edge of control signal φ2 can be configured to go high five clock cycles after the φ1 signals goes low at t2. - The advantage of the DPWM controller described with respect to
FIGS. 34-37 is that it enables the point at which the leading edge of control signal φ2 goes high at time t3, and thus the dead time to be programmably adjusted independently of the trailing edge of control signal φ1. Thus, the value of x may comprise any positive or negative value adjusted by the offset adders in the trim and limit circuitry. If the value x comprises a negative value, the situation as illustrated inFIG. 52 c occurs. In this case, the first control signal φ1 is a function of u(n) as before with the trailing edge going low at time t3. However, in this case the dead time between the trailing edge of control signal φi and the leading edge of control signal φ2 is negative such that the leading edge ofcontrol signal 2 goes high at time t2 before the trailing edge of control signal φ1 goes low at time t3. The ability of the leading edge of control signal φ2 to go high at a time prior to traling edge of control signal φ1 going low is not available within previous analog or digital systems. In previous analog or digital systems the control of the leading edge control signal φ2 was always responsive to the trailing edge of control signal φ1 occurring at time t3. Since control signals φ1 and φ2 are programmed independently of each other with separate and individual finite state machines, the leading edge of control signal φ2 may go high at any point in time. This is useful in situations wherein complementary switches of a switched power supply have different switching times associated therewith, and the switch associated with signal φ2 takes longer to reach its steady state operating condition. - Thus, as illustrated in
FIG. 52 d, a second control signal φ2 may have its leading edge independently programmed from the trailing edge of the first control signal φ1 such that the dead time between the trailing edge of control signal φ1 and the leading edge of control signal φ2 may be adjusted in a positive direction from t3 to t4 or in a negative direction from time t3 to time t2 and referenced to the beginning of the switching cycle, or to any other edge in the system other than the trailing edge of φ1, the edge relating to the dead time requirement. - Referring now to
FIG. 53 , there is illustrated a schematic diagram of a multiphase switched power supply wherein the programmable nature of the phased outputs will enable controlling of the dead times between switches on the primary side and the secondary side. The primary side of the switched power supply includes aDC supply 5302 connected betweennode 5304 and ground. A pair of switchingtransistors node 5304 and ground. The drain/source path oftransistor 5306 is connected betweennode 5304 andnode 5310. The gate oftransistor 5306 is connected to the PH1 control output.Transistor 5308 has its drain/source path connected betweennode 5310 and ground. The gate oftransistor 5308 is connected to the PH2 control output. Thebody diodes transistors capacitor 5316 is connected betweennode 5304 andnode 5318. Anothercapacitor 5320 is connected betweennode 5318 and ground. Athird switching transistor 5322 has its source/drain path connected betweennode 5318 and the annode ofdiode 5324. The gate oftransistor 5322 is connected to the PH3 control output. The cathode ofdiode 5324 is connected tonode 5310.Inductor 5326 is connected betweennode 5318 and one input of the primary side ofpower transformer 5328. The second input of the primary side ofpower transformer 5328 is connected tonode 5310. - The secondary side of power transformer 3328 is connected between
nodes first inductor 5334 is connected betweennode 5330 andnode 5336. Asecond inductor 5338 is connected betweennode 5336 andnode 5332. Acapacitor 5340 is connected inparallel with aresistor 5342 betweennode 5336 andnode 5344. Afourth switching transistor 5346 has its source/drain path connected betweennode 5344 andnode 5330. The gate oftransistor 5346 is connected to the PH4 control output. Afifth switching transistor 5348 has its source/drain path connected betweennode 5344 andnode 5332. The gate oftransistor 5348 is connected to the PH5 control output. - Referring now to
FIG. 54 , there is illustrated a timing diagram for the phase control signals applied to each of the switching transistors of the switched power supply illustrated inFIG. 53 by way of example. In this case, it is desired to control the dead time between the phase control signals PH1 on the primary side of the switched power supply and PH4 on the secondary side of the switched power supply due to switching delays within the switching transistors and across the power transformer. The control signal PH1 has a leading edge occurring at time t1 and a trailing edge occurring at time t3. The distance between the leading edge of time t1 and the trailing edge at time t3 is a function of the u(n) value determined by the filter and the trailing edge occurs when the count value between the leading and trailing edges is equal to u(n). The leading edge of the PH1 control output at the time t1 is an absolute edge occurring at a defined count value of the master DPWM clock from the beginning of the switching cycle. The control signal PH2 has a leading edge occurring at time t4 which is relative distance from the falling edge of signal PH1 at time t2 of a predetermined number of clock cycles of the master clock. The trailing edge of the PH2 control signal occurs at time t6, and is a function of the u(n) signal. (It is noted that u(n) continually changes and, thus, a counter counts the number of clock cycles from the time t4 until the count value equals the instantaneous value of u(n) at time t6.) The leading edge of the PH3 control output occurs at time t5, and is a relative edge to the leading edge of the PH2 control output occurring at t4. The trailing edge of the PH3 control signal occurs at time t8, and is an absolute edge always occurring at the same defined point in a frame, i.e., at the end of the switching cycle. The leading edge of the PH4 output is an absolute edge occurring at time to in a frame, i.e., the beginning of the switching cycle with an absolute value of “0”. The trailing edge of the PH4 output occurs at time t3, and has a dead time period from the trailing edge of PH1 occurring at time t2. In this case, the dead time is established by generating the trailing edge of the PH4 control output at time t3 and dependent upon the value of u(n) plus some defined offset value. By establishing this offset in conjunction with the value of u(n), a set dead time may be established, since the PH4 output edges and PH1 output edges are both dependent on u(n). Since both are dependent on u(n), the edges may be generated independently with a defined positive or negative offset. With respect to the PH5 control output its leading edge occurs at time t3, and is a relative edge to the trailing edge of the PH1 control output occurring at time t2 by a final number of cycles. A dead time period between the leading edge of the PH2 control output and the trailing edge of the PH5 output occurring at time t7 is established by generating the trailing edge at time t7 in such a manner that it is dependent upon the u(n) signal plus some offset value, but referenced to the PH2 control output rising edge. In this case, the trailing edge of the PH5 control output at t7 will always be different from the falling edge of the PH2 output by the established offset since both signals are generated based upon u(n) and both are a fixed number of clock cycles delayed from the trailing edge of PH1. By making the leading or trailing edges of signals dependent of the u(n) signal plus or minus some offset, a programmable dead time may be established between various phase output control signals. As such, the trailing edge of PH5 is based on the leading edge of PH2 as a reference edge that sets a reference count value and then the value of u(n) +/− an offset is added thereto such that, when the master counter equals the is equal to PH2 LE+u(n) +/− offset, then the trailing edge of PH5 will be generated. - Referring now to
FIG. 55 , there is illustrated a flow diagram describing the manner in which the dead time between a first and a second phase control signal output may be established. Initially, atstep 5500, the desired dead time to occur between the first and second phase output control signals is determined. The requirements for a pair of corrected values of u(n) are established within the trim and limit circuitry in the manner described previously with respect toFIGS. 36 a and 36 b. A desired positive or negative offset may be applied atstep 5502 to one u(n) signal to establish the dead time period for a corrected u(n) signal. A second corrected u(n) signal is established without the offset. The minimum and maximum ranges are established atstep 5503 for each corrected u(n) signal in accordance with the low limit registers and the high limit registers as described with respect toFIGS. 36 a and 36 b. The trim and limit circuitry provides a number of corrected values of u(n), and the desired corrected values of u(n) are selected atstep 5504. - Using first selected value of u(n) without an offset and the established control values within the control register for a particular phase output, the pattern generator for a first phase output and either the leading or trailing edge is programmed at
step 5506 to generate the control phase output edge in a desired manner. The control values are used along with the value of u(n) to create a leading edge and a trailing edge at desired locations in a frame, each potentially independent of the other. This process is more fully described with respect toFIGS. 34-37 . Using the desired dead time, a pattern generator for the second phase output signal is programmed atstep 5510 using a second corrected value of u(n) having the necessary offset included therein and the necessary control values within the control register for the leading and trailing edges of the second phase output. The control values for the trim and limit circuit and the control registers are provided by the controlling microprocessor. Once the desired control values are set within the control registers for the first phase output and the second phase output, the leading and trailing edges for the first and second phase outputs are each independently generated atstep 5512 using the programmed pattern generators and the corrected value of u(n). This will provide the first and second control signals having a dead time between the control signals programmed to a desired value. - Finite State Machine
- Referring now to
FIG. 56 , there is illustrated a more detailed diagrammatic view of a portion of a pattern generator for the generation of a single edge associated with generating a particular phase control output. As noted hereinabove, each phase output is comprised of a leading edge and trailing edge, this leading edge being either rising or falling and the trailing edge either falling or rising, respectively. The embodiment ofFIG. 56 is for a single edge in a single phase, wherein the embodiment ofFIG. 37 illustrates the generation of both the leading and trailing edge for a given phase output. Essentially, the leading edge operation and the trailing edge operation are logically OR'ed together to provide an output phase control signal for a given switching device. - In general, each edge for each phase control output is generated utilizing a finite state machine (FSM). This finite state machine is noted with a
reference numeral 5602. As noted inFIG. 37 and the description associated therewith, there are multiple inputs that are provided to the finite state machine. There is provided an operand value from amultiplexer 5604, that being similar tomultiplexers FIG. 37 . These are 9-bit values. The u(n) value is the value that is determined at the control loop and represents the number of counts for the width of PH1. This is effectively the number of counts that PH1 is active high and allows current to be passed to the inductive element. The duty cycle is equal to u(n) divided by the total count for a given frame, which total count for a given flame represents the length of the switching cycle in counts of a master counter. The master count is initiated upon the initiation of a particular switching cycle and it is incremented by the master clock. This switching cycle has a fixed number of counts. - As noted hereinabove, the value of u(n) determined through the loop controller and output by the PBD can be corrected by the trim and limit circuitry to provide a positive or negative offset. Therefore, the uncorrected u(n) is input to one of multiple trim and
limit circuits 5606, one potentially for each edge, such that if there are “x” phases, there could potentially be “2x” trim and limit circuits. In the circuit illustrated inFIG. 34 , there are only four trim and limit circuits provided, it being understood that more could be utilized. Thus, each edge can independently be determined utilizing a value of u(n) that is either increased by a positive offset or decreased in value by a predetermined negative offset without reference to the generation of other edges by the finite state machines associated with the other edges. Thefinite state machine 5602 selects the output C(u(n)) one of these trim andlimit circuits 5606 for use therewith by amultiplexer 5608, it being understood that each trim andlimit circuit 5606 can have a different and programmable offset associated therewith. This provides the corrected value C(u(n)). Themultiplexer 5604 selects this input if the edge associated therewith is to be based upon this potentially corrected value. The other input that is provided, as set forth with respect to themultiplexers FIG. 37 , is the selection of an edge control from another phase generator, i.e., the generation of another edge in the system. This is provided by amultiplexer 5610 and provides the frame of reference for the associated edge. This selects between one of the multiple phase edges, it being a leading or a trailing edge. Additionally, the initial edge of the switching cycle will be provided by an FSYNCH signal. Essentially, this is a zero count value of the master counter at the beginning of the switching cycle. - As described hereinabove with reference to
FIG. 37 ,finite state machine 5602 is operable to generate an edge based upon an absolute value of counts from the initiation of the switching cycle, a fixed number of counts relative to another edge in the system, this being a relative value, or a number of counts based upon the u(n) value. Thus, the edge generation is either absolute, relative or u(n). This u(n) value based decision, when selected, determines a count value from either the beginning of the switching cycle or another edge generated in the system. Each of these will be described hereinbelow. - Inside the
finite state machine 5602, there is provided anadder 5612. Theadder 5612 is operable to add the value of the operand, which constitutes a count value with the value of the selected phase from themultiplexer 5610 or an external beginning of switching frame signal referred to as FSYNCH. This is facilitated with amultiplexer 5614. Therefore, the actual reference is provided out of themultiplexer 5614 from which the operand is to count. This reference represents a count value within the switching frame for either the occurrence of one of the edges in one of the phases or an external pulse, which represents the “0” count of the master counter represented byblock 5618. Therefore, the adder will provide on the output thereof the desired count value. This is compared in acomparator 5620 to the count value of the master counter which, as described hereinabove, is reset at a value of “0” at the beginning of a switching cycle. By adding the count value output by themultiplexer 5604 to the reference phase, this count value output by themultiplexer 5604 basically provides an additional count to that already provided by the output ofmultiplexer 5610 such that this output of themultiplexer 5610 provides a reference or “normalized” count value. When the desired count value output by theadder 5612 is equal to the master counter output, the output of thecomparator 5620 will go high representing the generation of an edge. This is input to a set/reset latch 5622 which is associated with each phase control signal, PHx. This provides the appropriate edge on the output. Thislatch 5622 is controlled such that it is biased one direction or the other, i.e., it will be a rising edge or a falling edge on the output thereof. This merely requires inverting the value thereof. This is provided by one of the control signals in the register such that the leading edge will either be a high going edge or a low going edge. Thefinite state machine 5602 represents the “leading” edge of the particular phase control output. The other edge, the trailing edge, of the phase control output is provided through a substantially identicalfinite state machine 5624 which is connected to the reset input of thelatch 5622. Thus, each edge is independently generated and then combined with thelatch 5622 in order to provide a “state change” from an initial state to a second state with a leading edge and then back to the initial state with a trailing edge. Each of thefinite state machines multiplexer 5604 associated withfinite state machine 5602 and the corresponding multiplexer associated withfinite state machine 5624 can independently select the type of edge that is generated and themultiplexer 5610 and corresponding multiplexer in thefinite state machine 5624 can select the reference edge or count of the master counter from which the count is calculated. Each of thefinite state machines adder 5612 andcomparator 5620 for determining when the edge is to be generated. All the finite state machines for each of the phase control signals operate off of themaster counter 5618. - Referring now to
FIGS. 57 a-57 b, there are illustrated diagrams for each of the edge generation decisions for respective edge generated. Specifically,FIG. 57 a illustrates the generation of an edge based upon either Absolute value or a u(n) value. This wave form requires generation of both a leading and a trailing edge for PH1. There will typically be a fixed number of clock cycles before the generation of aleading edge 5702. This can be a value of “0” or it can be a fixed number of clock cycles. It may be desirable to actually utilize a fixed number of clock cycles for this. After the generation of the leading edge, this being the Absolute edge decision for the leading edge of PH1, the trailing edge is the next edge that has to be generated. It should be understood that this edge is generated independently of theleading edge 5702. The trailing edge is indicated by a reference numeral of 5704. This edge is a function of u(n). It is generated from theabsolute edge 5702 or from the beginning of the switching cycle if the absolute value of the leading edge is “0.” Thus, the number of counts represented by the output of the loop filter for u(n) determines when theedge 5704 will be generated. In general, the value of u(n) is a varying value output by the filter. Thus, it is possible that this value can vary from the beginning of the switching cycle to the generation of theedge 5704. Basically, thefinite state machine 5602 that is associated with the trailingedge 5704 will determine when theedge 5704 will be generated. This is facilitated by comparing a count value of the master DPWM counter with the desired count value at the output of theadder 5612, which is representative of a normalized count value at theedge 5702, and, when it equals u(n), theedge 5704 is generated. - Referring now to
FIG. 57 b, there is illustrated an edge generated using the relative input value stored in the register and selected by themultiplexer 5604. In this embodiment, the pulse generated has a risingedge 5706 that is the trigger edge, this also being the leading edge. This is generated, in this illustration, by an independent finite state machine that generatesedge 5706 at a count value of u(n) from the start of the switching cycle. However, anedge 5708, the trailing edge associated with leadingedge 5706, is generated a fixed number of cycles after leadingedge 5706. Thus, to define thisedge 5708, it is only necessary to store the relative value and the edge to which it is referenced, this edge being any edge in the system. - Referring now to
FIG. 57 c, there is illustrated an edge generated utilizing the value of u(n) but generating this relative to another edge. Further, this is generated not only with the value of u(n), but also a corrected value, by adding or subtracting an offset therefrom. The reference edge is noted as being aleading edge 5710 on the same pulse (but could be from another phase control signal). A trailingedge 5712 is generated by adding or subtracting an offset with a trim and limit circuit from the value of the u(n) measured relative to theedge 5710. Therefore, the width of this particular pulse is the C(u(n)) generated by the trim and limit circuit. Since the value of C(u(n)) is equal to u(n) +/− offset, the offset is determined by the contents of the offset register and then only modifies the value of u(n). When the normalized count value measured from thereference edge 5710 equals C(u(n)), theedge 5712 is generated. - Reffering now to
FIG. 57 d, there is illustrated a diagram showing an edge generated based upon u(n) +/− offset and based upon the start of the switching cycle as the reference edge. This is a single edge, the leading edge, 5714. It should be noted that this edge can be utilized for the dead time determination due to the fact that it is generated based upon a reference edge to which another pulse is initially referenced to when generated. This will be described hereinbelow. - Referring now to
FIGS. 58 a and 58 b, there is illustrated a diagrammatic view of how the dead time is determined utilizing the embodiment ofFIG. 57 d. In this embodiment, the initial phase, PH1, is generated by generating aleading edge 5802 from the beginning of the switching cycle by a distance equal to the value in the Absolute register, it being noted that this could be “0.” The trailing edge, anedge 5806, is generated after the normalized count value from theedge 5802 has been determined to equal u(n). This was noted hereinabove. A second pulse generates a leading edge 5708 a predetermined amount of time from theedge 5806. The reason for this, as described hereinabove, is to ensure that there is some type of dead time in the conduction of one active device versus another in a complimentary pair. However, as also noted hereinabove, it may be that, due to the parasitics in the system, theedge 5708 is required to be generated prior toedge 5806. Theedge 5708 is generated not based upon theedge 5806 but based upon a corrected u(n) value reference to theedge 5802, i.e., the same as was the case for theedge 5806. Thus, even though the dead time is important to be determined between theedge 5806 and theedge 5708, theedge 5708 is generated from another reference than that to which it is actually desirable to be relative to. Since both are relative to the same reference edge, they are essentially related edges. However, in certain situations, as noted herein above, it may be desirable that theedge 5708 occurs before theedge 5806. If this is the case, it is difficult to do that in an analog situation wherein one edge is generated from another, i.e., they are pipelined. With the offset actually being a negative value such that the corrected value of u(n) can be less than u(n), then thisedge 5708 can be generated prior to theedge 5806. This is illustrated inFIG. 58 b wherein theedge 5708′ is generated prior to theedge 5806. - Referring now to
FIG. 59 , there is illustrated a flow chart depicting the generation of a Relative edge. This is initiated at ablock 5902 and then proceeds todecision block 5904 to determine if a reference edge has been generated to which the relative edge is related. When this occurs, the program will flow to afunction block 5906 to fetch the contents of a relative edge, this, as noted hereinabove, being a 9-bit fixed value. The program then flows to afunction block 5908 to normalize the count value. (Note that this is just to provide a frame of reference). As noted herein above, the master counter is initiated at the beginning of the switching cycle. The count value is normalized at the reference edge, such that this now becomes the virtual “0” count value. The program then flows to adecision block 5910 to determine if the normalized count, i.e., that from the reference edge, is equal to the value of the Relative register. When this occurs, the program flows to afunction block 5912 to generate the edge and then to anEnd block 5914. - Referring now to
FIG. 60 , there is illustrated a flow chart depicting the generation of the Absolute edge, which is initiated at ablock 6002. The program then flows to adecision block 6004 to determine if the master DPWM counter value associated with the start of the switching cycle has occurred. The master DPWM counter is reset at the beginning of the switching cycle. As noted hereinabove, the Absolute operational mode is a mode wherein the count value is measured from the edge of the initiation of the switching cycle. When the switching cycle has been initiated, the program will flow along a “Y” path to afunction block 6006 to fetch the contents of the Absolute register. The program then flows to afunction block 6008 to determine if the count value, this not being a normalized count, is equal to a register value. When this occurs, the program flows to afunction block 6010 to generate the edge and then to anEnd block 6012. - Referring now to
FIG. 61 , there is illustrated a flowchart depicting the operation of generating a u(n) related edge, which is initiated at ablock 6102 and then proceeds to adecision block 6104.Decision block 6104 determines when a reference edge occurs, it being noted that the u(n) based edge can be generated based upon a reference edge generated by another finite state machine, it can be generated based upon the initiation of the switching cycle, or it can be generated from another edge in the same phase control output for that associated PHx. As noted hereinabove, each edge is generated independently, such that each other edge in the system constitutes a potential reference edge. When this reference edge occurs, the program flows to adecision block 6106 to determine if a corrected u(n) value is to be utilized. If not, this indicates that the actual u(n) value is to be utilized, and then the program flows to afunction block 6108 to normalize the counter value at the reference edge and then flows to adecision block 6110 to determine if the normalized count value determined from the reference edge is equal to the value of u(n). When this occurs, the program flows along the “Y” path to afunction block 6112 to generate the edge and then to anEnd block 6114. - If the corrected u(n) value is to be utilized, i.e., there is to be provided an offset, the program flows along the “Y” path to the
function block 6116 from thedecision block 6106 to select the offset stored in the register. This if facilitated by both selecting one of the trim and limit circuits with themultiplexer 5608 and then fetching the contents of the offset register therefrom. The program then flows to afunction block 6118 to generate the corrected value of u(n) and then to afunction block 6120 to normalize the counter at the reference edge. The program then flows to adecision block 6122 in order to determine if the normalized count measured from the reference edge is equal to the corrected value of u(n). When this occurs, the program flows to thefunction block 6112 in order to generate the edge. - It can be seen that since this is a finite state machine, it takes a very small number of cycles in order to execute the operation. In general, it basically takes one cycle to determine the value and then another clock cycle in order to clock this through to the output, which is typically what is required for a gated operation.
- Dead Time Operation
- Referring now to
FIG. 62 , there is illustrated a diagrammatic view of a dead time optimization system. This is a multi-phase system, as described hereinabove. For illustrative purposes, six different switches have been provided and interfaced with aninductive element 6202 that drives the capacitive element 6204. A first switch, the primary switch, driven by a phase φ1, connects the input voltage to the top side of theinductor 6202, with asecond switch 6208 driven by phase φ2. These are complimentary switches. A second set of complimentary switches is provided by aswitch 6205 connected between the input and the top level of capacitors 6204 with a switch and driven by phase φ and aswitch 6210 connected to ground and driven by phase φ4. A third set of complimentary switches is provided by aswitch 6206 driven by φ5 connected between the input voltage and the top capacitor 6204 with aswitch 6212 connecting the top layer of the capacitor to ground with a phase φ6. These switches and their configurations are for exemplary purposes only to show three sets of complimentary switches. An example of a multi-phase system is illustrated inFIG. 53 . - The current input to the switch 6204 is sensed with a
current sense circuit 6226, which is a Hall sensor. This is provided to adigital controller block 6228, which represents the overall digital control loop that generates the six different phases. This is controlled in part by a start-upblock 6230 which is basically operable to initiate the dead time optimization routine whenever a power-up condition exists, a re-start-up condition exists or even a manual input is received for such dead time optimization. Any other reason for initiating a dead time optimization routine will be represented by theblock 6230. This is typically facilitated with the microcontroller. Adead time register 6232 is provided for storing the dead time value. It is noted that the user can initially set a dead time value for the purpose of configuring the overall power supply. This dead time will then be varied with the optimization routine. It can be seen from the timing diagram associated withFIG. 62 that there will be two edges represented by the complimentary switches wherein one edge is desired to occur after another edge, such that one switch is turned off before another switch in a complimentary pair is turned on. This was described hereinabove. - Referring now to
FIG. 63 , there is illustrated a plot of dead time versus current wherein it can be seen that, as the dead time decreases, the current will increase, resulting from the one complimentary switch connected to ground shunning current. Further, as the dead time increases, current will also increase due to inefficiencies. There will be a minimum current versus dead time that will occur, which is desirable from the optimization routine. This is the desirable operating mode. - Referring now to
FIG. 64 , there is illustrated a flow chart depicting the optimization routine for optimizing dead time. This is initiated at theblock 6402, which can be initiated, as noted hereinabove, through either power up, manually or restart. The program then flows to afunction block 6404 wherein the initial value of the dead time is set to “0” or to some other value, even the value designated by a user. The program then flows to afunction block 6406 wherein the current is measured and is stored, as noted in afunction block 6408. The value of dead time is then incremented, as indicated by thefunction block 6410 and then the current measured, as indicated by afunction block 6412. The program then flows to adecision block 6414 to determine if the present current is less than the stored current. If so, the program then flows to afunction block 6418 to store the current and then back to thefunction block 6410 to again increment the dead time value. If the current atdecision block 6414 is determined to be greater than the stored current, then the final current is the stored current from the last cycle, as indicated byblock 6416. However, it is noted that this routine must be cycled through for both the negative direction and the positive direction from the initial value to determine the actual minimum. - Although the preferred embodiment has been described in detail, it should be understood that various changes, substitutions and alterations can be made therein without departing from the scope of the invention as defined by the appended claims.
Claims (19)
1. A method for optimizing the efficiency of a digital switched power supply having a plurality of switches responsive to generated pulse control signals, comprising the steps of :
varying the initiation of conduction in at least one of the switches relative to the conduction in another of the switches by controlling when an edge in an associated one of the pulse control signals is generated;
measuring the current to the power supply during the step of varying;
determining a minima in the measured current over the step of varying; and
after the step of determining, freezing the configuration of the respective pulse control signals at the minima.
2. The method of claim 1 , wherein the one of the switches and the another of the switches constitute a complimentary pair of switches in operation, such that, operationally, one of the switches in the complimentary pair is changes from a conducting state to a non conducting state in response to a first pulse edge associated with one of the pulse control signals and the other of the switches therein changes from a non conducting state to a conducting state in response to a second pulse edge associated with one of the pulse control signals and the step of varying is operable vary the relative time between generation of the first and second pulse edges.
3. The method of claim 2 , wherein the step of varying is operable to cause the second step to occur prior to the occurrence of the first edge at one extreme ad to occur after the first pulse edge at another extreme.
4. The method of claim 2 , wherein each of the first and second pulse edges is generated independent of the other.
5. The method of claim 5 , wherein an edge configuration register is provided for containing programming information for determining the position of the associated edge within a switching cycle of the power supply, such that the step of varying is operable to alter the contents of the configuration register for at least one of the pair of switches and the step of freezing comprises latching the contents of the configuration register for the at least one of the pair of switches after the step of determining.
6. The method of claim 1 , wherein the digital power supply includes a digital controller for generating the pulse control signals and wherein the steps of varying, measuring, determining and freezing occurs in response to a power up signal that initiates operation of the digital controller.
7. A method for optimizing the operation of a digital pulse width modulated power supply having a plurality of switches, of which at least two are complimentary switches, comprising the steps of:
generating a plurality of pulse control signals, each operable to turn on and off one of the switches;
controlling the pulse width of each of the pulse control signals with a digital controller, parameterizing the operation of the digital controller with a processor for applying predetermined parameters to the digital controller to define the operation thereof;
operating the processor in an optimization mode by:
determining the optimum dead time between the time that one of the two complimentary switches changes to a non conductive state prior to the other of the complimentary switches changing to the conductive state in order to minimize the current to the power supply for a given load on the power supply; and
utilizing the determined optimize dead time as a parameter for normal operation of the processor.
8. The method of claim 7 , wherein the step of determining comprises the steps of:
varying the dead time;
measuring the current to the power supply during the step of varying;
determining a minima in the measured current over the step of varying; and
after the step of determining, freezing the configuration of the respective pulse control signals at the minima as a parameter for use by the processor.
9. The method of claim 7 , wherein each of the pulse control signals in the step of generating is generated separately and each of the edges in the associated pulse control signals is individually controlled by the processor.
10. The method of claim 9 , wherein the step of controlling the pulse width with respect to the pulse control signals associated with the two complimentary switches comprises controlling the time that the leading edge of the other of the complimentary switches occurs relative to the occurrence of the one of the complimentary switches, the difference therebetween comprising the dead time.
11. The method of claim 10 , wherein the step of determining includes controlling the edge of the other of the complimentary switches to vary the dead time from one extreme to decrease the dead time from a nominal starting value to the opposite extreme to increase the dead time.
12. The method of claim 11 , wherein the one extreme is negative, such that the leading edge of the other of the complimentary switches occurs prior to the trailing edge of the one of the complimentary switches.
13. A digital pulse width modulated power supply having a plurality of switches, of which at least two are complimentary switches that require a dead time between the conduction of one to the conduction of the other, comprising:
a digital pulse width modulator (DPWM) for generating a plurality of pulse control signals, each operable to turn on and off one of the switches;
a digital controller for controlling said DPWM to define the pulse width of each of the pulse control signals;
a processor for parameterizing the operation of the digital controller for applying predetermined parameters to the digital controller to define the operation thereof;
an optimizer for operating the processor in a dead time optimization mode by determining the optimum dead time between the time that one of the two complimentary switches changes to a non conductive state prior to the other of the complimentary switches changing to the conductive state in order to minimize the current to the power supply for a given load on the power supply; and
said processor utilizing the determined optimized dead time as a parameter for normal operation for parameterizing the operation of the digital controller.
14. The power supply of claim 13 , wherein said optimizer comprises:
said processor varying the dead time;
a current sensor for measuring the current to the power supply when the dad time is varied by said processor;
said processor determining a minima in the measured current over the range that the dead time is varied; and
said processor freezing the configuration of the respective pulse control signals at the minima as a parameter for use by said processor.
15. The power supply of claim 13 , wherein each of the pulse control signals in said DPWM is generated separately and each of the edges in the associated pulse control signals is individually controlled by said processor.
16. The power supply of claim 15 , wherein said processor controls the pulse width with respect to the pulse control signals associated with the two complimentary switches by controlling the time that the leading edge of the other of the complimentary switches occurs relative to the occurrence of the one of the complimentary switches.
17. The power supply of claim 16 , wherein said processor controls the edge of the other of the complimentary switches to vary the dead time from one extreme to decrease the dead time from a nominal starting value to the opposite extreme to increase the dead time.
18. The power supply of claim 17 , wherein the one extreme is negative, such that the leading edge of the other of the complimentary switches occurs prior to the trailing edge of the one of the complimentary switches.
19. The power Supply of claim 13 , and further comprising circuitry for initiating the operation of said optimizer.
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US11/172,351 US20060023781A1 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-06-30 | Digital PWM controller with efficiency optimization |
US11/291,648 US20060083037A1 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-12-01 | Digital PWM controller with efficiency optimization as a function of PWM duty cycle |
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US59146304P | 2004-07-27 | 2004-07-27 | |
US11/096,597 US7428159B2 (en) | 2005-03-31 | 2005-03-31 | Digital PWM controller |
US11/172,351 US20060023781A1 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-06-30 | Digital PWM controller with efficiency optimization |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US11/096,597 Continuation-In-Part US7428159B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-03-31 | Digital PWM controller |
Related Child Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US11/291,648 Continuation-In-Part US20060083037A1 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-12-01 | Digital PWM controller with efficiency optimization as a function of PWM duty cycle |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20060023781A1 true US20060023781A1 (en) | 2006-02-02 |
Family
ID=35731389
Family Applications (7)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US11/170,541 Expired - Fee Related US7142140B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-06-29 | Auto scanning ADC for DPWM |
US11/172,738 Expired - Fee Related US7426645B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-06-30 | Digital power supply controller with integrated microcontroller |
US11/172,351 Abandoned US20060023781A1 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-06-30 | Digital PWM controller with efficiency optimization |
US11/172,482 Active 2028-03-07 US7640455B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-06-30 | Digital PWM controller with programmable safe state in presence of fault |
US11/172,344 Active 2025-09-02 US7498787B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-06-30 | Digital PWM controller for digital power supply having programmable dead times |
US11/236,098 Expired - Fee Related US7315160B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-09-27 | Non linear controlled power supply with a linear soft start operation |
US12/211,631 Expired - Fee Related US7855905B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2008-09-16 | Digital power supply controller with integrated microcontroller |
Family Applications Before (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US11/170,541 Expired - Fee Related US7142140B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-06-29 | Auto scanning ADC for DPWM |
US11/172,738 Expired - Fee Related US7426645B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-06-30 | Digital power supply controller with integrated microcontroller |
Family Applications After (4)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US11/172,482 Active 2028-03-07 US7640455B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-06-30 | Digital PWM controller with programmable safe state in presence of fault |
US11/172,344 Active 2025-09-02 US7498787B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-06-30 | Digital PWM controller for digital power supply having programmable dead times |
US11/236,098 Expired - Fee Related US7315160B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2005-09-27 | Non linear controlled power supply with a linear soft start operation |
US12/211,631 Expired - Fee Related US7855905B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2008-09-16 | Digital power supply controller with integrated microcontroller |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (7) | US7142140B2 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2006015015A2 (en) |
Cited By (12)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20050281058A1 (en) * | 2004-06-21 | 2005-12-22 | Issa Batarseh | Dynamic optimization of efficiency using dead time and FET drive control |
US20060023479A1 (en) * | 2004-07-27 | 2006-02-02 | Leung Ka Y | PID based controller for DC-DC converter with post-processing filters |
US20070182610A1 (en) * | 2006-02-03 | 2007-08-09 | L&L Engineering, Llc | Systems and methods for digital control |
US7426123B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2008-09-16 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Finite state machine digital pulse width modulator for a digitally controlled power supply |
US7426645B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2008-09-16 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Digital power supply controller with integrated microcontroller |
US7428159B2 (en) | 2005-03-31 | 2008-09-23 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Digital PWM controller |
WO2008140734A1 (en) * | 2007-05-08 | 2008-11-20 | International Rectifier Corporation | Digital pwm modulator with fast dynamic response and fine resolution |
US20090147585A1 (en) * | 2007-12-05 | 2009-06-11 | Spansion Llc | Flexible word line boosting across vcc supply |
US20100064124A1 (en) * | 2006-11-16 | 2010-03-11 | Karl Rinne | Digital power controller |
US20130093515A1 (en) * | 2010-12-15 | 2013-04-18 | Liang Cheng | Pwm comparator and class d amplifier |
CN103094117A (en) * | 2011-11-01 | 2013-05-08 | 上海华虹Nec电子有限公司 | Technique method of manufacturing bottom thick grate oxide layer groove metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) |
US20160164701A1 (en) * | 2014-12-04 | 2016-06-09 | Stmicroelectronics (Rousset) Sas | Transmission and Reception Methods for a Binary Signal on a Serial Link |
Families Citing this family (126)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US7394445B2 (en) * | 2002-11-12 | 2008-07-01 | Power-One, Inc. | Digital power manager for controlling and monitoring an array of point-of-load regulators |
US7456617B2 (en) * | 2002-11-13 | 2008-11-25 | Power-One, Inc. | System for controlling and monitoring an array of point-of-load regulators by a host |
US6833691B2 (en) * | 2002-11-19 | 2004-12-21 | Power-One Limited | System and method for providing digital pulse width modulation |
US7836322B2 (en) * | 2002-12-21 | 2010-11-16 | Power-One, Inc. | System for controlling an array of point-of-load regulators and auxiliary devices |
US7737961B2 (en) * | 2002-12-21 | 2010-06-15 | Power-One, Inc. | Method and system for controlling and monitoring an array of point-of-load regulators |
US7266709B2 (en) * | 2002-12-21 | 2007-09-04 | Power-One, Inc. | Method and system for controlling an array of point-of-load regulators and auxiliary devices |
US7673157B2 (en) | 2002-12-21 | 2010-03-02 | Power-One, Inc. | Method and system for controlling a mixed array of point-of-load regulators through a bus translator |
US7882372B2 (en) * | 2002-12-21 | 2011-02-01 | Power-One, Inc. | Method and system for controlling and monitoring an array of point-of-load regulators |
US7249267B2 (en) * | 2002-12-21 | 2007-07-24 | Power-One, Inc. | Method and system for communicating filter compensation coefficients for a digital power control system |
US7743266B2 (en) * | 2002-12-21 | 2010-06-22 | Power-One, Inc. | Method and system for optimizing filter compensation coefficients for a digital power control system |
US7373527B2 (en) * | 2002-12-23 | 2008-05-13 | Power-One, Inc. | System and method for interleaving point-of-load regulators |
US7710092B2 (en) * | 2003-02-10 | 2010-05-04 | Power-One, Inc. | Self tracking ADC for digital power supply control systems |
US7023190B2 (en) * | 2003-02-10 | 2006-04-04 | Power-One, Inc. | ADC transfer function providing improved dynamic regulation in a switched mode power supply |
US7080265B2 (en) * | 2003-03-14 | 2006-07-18 | Power-One, Inc. | Voltage set point control scheme |
US6936999B2 (en) * | 2003-03-14 | 2005-08-30 | Power-One Limited | System and method for controlling output-timing parameters of power converters |
US7372682B2 (en) * | 2004-02-12 | 2008-05-13 | Power-One, Inc. | System and method for managing fault in a power system |
US7554310B2 (en) * | 2005-03-18 | 2009-06-30 | Power-One, Inc. | Digital double-loop output voltage regulation |
US7141956B2 (en) * | 2005-03-18 | 2006-11-28 | Power-One, Inc. | Digital output voltage regulation circuit having first control loop for high speed and second control loop for high accuracy |
US7239115B2 (en) * | 2005-04-04 | 2007-07-03 | Power-One, Inc. | Digital pulse width modulation controller with preset filter coefficients |
US7327149B2 (en) * | 2005-05-10 | 2008-02-05 | Power-One, Inc. | Bi-directional MOS current sense circuit |
GB2427801B (en) * | 2005-06-29 | 2010-03-24 | Agilent Technologies Inc | A method and apparatus for extracting individual pulses from an input signal |
US7196588B2 (en) * | 2005-07-22 | 2007-03-27 | Mediatek Incorporation | Auto-gain controlled digital phase-locked loop and method thereof |
US7391196B2 (en) * | 2005-09-30 | 2008-06-24 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | In system analysis and compensation for a digital PWM controller |
US7568117B1 (en) * | 2005-10-03 | 2009-07-28 | Zilker Labs, Inc. | Adaptive thresholding technique for power supplies during margining events |
US8116704B2 (en) | 2006-11-09 | 2012-02-14 | Parkervision, Inc. | Switching power supply |
US9413233B2 (en) | 2005-10-24 | 2016-08-09 | Parkervision, Inc. | Switching power supply with dynamically programmed threshold voltage |
JP4841282B2 (en) * | 2006-03-24 | 2011-12-21 | 富士通セミコンダクター株式会社 | Power supply device control circuit, power supply device, and control method therefor |
US7388358B2 (en) * | 2006-05-17 | 2008-06-17 | Winbond Electronics Corporation | Method and apparatus for a pulse width modulated DC-DC converter |
JP2009545284A (en) * | 2006-07-21 | 2009-12-17 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ | Power supply with binary controller and binary controller |
TW200814499A (en) * | 2006-09-01 | 2008-03-16 | Richtek Technology Corp | Switching type power supply and method of determining compensation coefficients |
US7692938B2 (en) * | 2006-09-06 | 2010-04-06 | Northern Power Systems, Inc. | Multiphase power converters and multiphase power converting methods |
TWI342163B (en) * | 2006-10-11 | 2011-05-11 | Princeton Technology Corp | Av player chip, av system, and related method capable of sharing digital-to-analog converter |
TWM313378U (en) * | 2006-10-20 | 2007-06-01 | Holtek Semiconductor Inc | Digital-to-analog conversion circuit applicable to power soft-switching circuit architecture |
US7570037B2 (en) * | 2006-11-17 | 2009-08-04 | Virginia Tech Intellectual Properties, Inc. | Hybrid control methods for digital pulse width modulator (DPWM) |
US7864546B2 (en) * | 2007-02-13 | 2011-01-04 | Akros Silicon Inc. | DC-DC converter with communication across an isolation pathway |
US7777368B2 (en) * | 2007-02-05 | 2010-08-17 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Redundant power supply with pulse width modulation soft start feature |
WO2008106162A1 (en) * | 2007-02-26 | 2008-09-04 | International Rectifier Corporation | Digital current sense |
US7667625B2 (en) * | 2007-02-28 | 2010-02-23 | Exar Corporation | Universal and fault-tolerant multiphase digital PWM controller for high-frequency DC-DC converters |
US20080238750A1 (en) * | 2007-03-29 | 2008-10-02 | Microchip Technology Incorporated | Intelligent Power Control Peripheral |
EP2158794B1 (en) * | 2007-06-15 | 2011-12-28 | Tridonic GmbH & Co KG | Operating device for operating a light source, particularly an led |
JP5049707B2 (en) * | 2007-09-07 | 2012-10-17 | ルネサスエレクトロニクス株式会社 | Semiconductor integrated circuit, PWM signal output device, and power conversion control device |
US7834613B2 (en) * | 2007-10-30 | 2010-11-16 | Power-One, Inc. | Isolated current to voltage, voltage to voltage converter |
US8031496B2 (en) * | 2007-11-07 | 2011-10-04 | Panasonic Corporation | Driving circuit for power switching device, driving method thereof, and switching power supply apparatus |
US7930389B2 (en) | 2007-11-20 | 2011-04-19 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Adaptive filtering of annotated messages or the like |
WO2009066273A1 (en) * | 2007-11-20 | 2009-05-28 | Universtiy Of Limerick | A digitally controlled isolated power converter |
US8952293B2 (en) * | 2008-03-14 | 2015-02-10 | Illinois Tool Works Inc. | Welding or cutting power supply using phase shift double forward converter circuit (PSDF) |
US8179705B2 (en) * | 2008-05-27 | 2012-05-15 | Power-One, Inc. | Apparatus and method of optimizing power system efficiency using a power loss model |
US20100001699A1 (en) * | 2008-07-02 | 2010-01-07 | Murata Power Solutions | Output voltage control circuit for modular power supplies |
CN101655687B (en) * | 2008-08-20 | 2011-11-09 | 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | Calibration system of voltage error |
CN101727158B (en) * | 2008-10-16 | 2011-06-22 | 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | Mainboard supply circuit |
EP2356681B1 (en) * | 2008-11-17 | 2013-01-23 | Raytheon Company | X-ray opaque coating |
JP5091101B2 (en) * | 2008-12-19 | 2012-12-05 | 株式会社リコー | Soft start circuit and power supply circuit including the soft start circuit |
US8384474B2 (en) | 2009-02-23 | 2013-02-26 | Harmon International Industries, Incorporated | Bi-directional and adjustable current source |
US7940124B2 (en) * | 2009-02-23 | 2011-05-10 | Harman International Industries, Incorporated | Bi-directional and adjustable current source |
DE102009013897A1 (en) * | 2009-03-19 | 2010-09-23 | Tridonicatco Gmbh & Co. Kg | Circuit and lighting system for dimming a lamp |
US7916053B2 (en) * | 2009-03-30 | 2011-03-29 | Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. | Analog-to-digital conversion module adapted for irregular sampling sequences |
JP5523733B2 (en) * | 2009-04-21 | 2014-06-18 | ルネサスエレクトロニクス株式会社 | Power supply control device and power supply control method |
TWI393334B (en) * | 2009-10-12 | 2013-04-11 | Richtek Technology Corp | Multi-phase buck converter with phase number compensation and phase number compensation method for a multi-phase buck converter |
US9058440B1 (en) * | 2009-12-15 | 2015-06-16 | Cadence Design Systems, Inc. | Method and mechanism for verifying and simulating power aware mixed-signal electronic designs |
DK2346155T3 (en) * | 2010-01-14 | 2014-10-27 | Siemens Ag | Method and control system for controlling power conversion in a power converter |
CN102263508B (en) * | 2010-05-28 | 2014-12-17 | 台达电子工业股份有限公司 | Resonant conversion system and overcurrent protection method |
FR2961967B1 (en) * | 2010-06-24 | 2012-07-20 | Continental Automotive France | METHOD FOR MANAGING THE POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE OF AN AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLE ELECTRONIC COMPUTER |
JP2012023499A (en) * | 2010-07-13 | 2012-02-02 | Panasonic Corp | Temperature detection circuit equipped with ad converter and semiconductor integrated circuit |
US8164391B2 (en) | 2010-07-28 | 2012-04-24 | Active-Semi, Inc. | Synchronization of multiple high frequency switching power converters in an integrated circuit |
JP5406146B2 (en) * | 2010-08-31 | 2014-02-05 | 日立オートモティブシステムズ株式会社 | Overcurrent detection device and overcurrent detection method for electric drive control device |
US9948175B2 (en) * | 2010-10-25 | 2018-04-17 | Analog Devices, Inc. | Soft-start control system and method for an isolated DC-DC converter with secondary controller |
US8508207B2 (en) * | 2010-10-29 | 2013-08-13 | R2 Semiconductor | Controlling a skew time of switches of a switching regulator |
EP2656493A4 (en) | 2010-12-20 | 2017-10-25 | California Institute of Technology | Low-to-medium power single chip digital controlled dc-dc regulator for point-of-load applications |
US8482266B2 (en) * | 2011-01-25 | 2013-07-09 | Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. | Voltage regulation circuitry and related operating methods |
US9043002B2 (en) * | 2011-01-31 | 2015-05-26 | Myoonet, Inc. | Adaptive control of electrical devices to achieve desired power use characteristics |
US8976543B1 (en) * | 2011-03-15 | 2015-03-10 | Lockheed Martin Corporation | Full bridge power supply with digital feedback |
US8648834B2 (en) | 2011-05-16 | 2014-02-11 | Pixart Imaging, Inc. | Controller and ADC for low power operation of touchscreen device |
US9143112B2 (en) | 2011-06-30 | 2015-09-22 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Circuits and methods for providing an impedance adjustment |
US8829945B2 (en) | 2011-07-05 | 2014-09-09 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Circuit and method for dynamic biasing of an output stage |
JP5655733B2 (en) * | 2011-07-21 | 2015-01-21 | サンケン電気株式会社 | Arithmetic processing device and microcomputer |
US8570079B2 (en) * | 2011-09-07 | 2013-10-29 | International Business Machines Corporation | Reducing phase locked loop phase lock time |
US8984323B2 (en) * | 2011-09-28 | 2015-03-17 | Microchip Technology Incorporated | Scheduling events in a microprocessor using a plurality of delta time registers arranged as a sequence buffer and indicating a sequence position of the sequence buffer to process an event |
US9190899B2 (en) * | 2011-09-28 | 2015-11-17 | General Electric Company | Power factor correction (PFC) circuit configured to control high pulse load current and inrush current |
TWI458228B (en) * | 2011-10-26 | 2014-10-21 | Acbel Polytech Inc | Soft start control method and device for power supply |
US9658294B2 (en) * | 2011-11-04 | 2017-05-23 | Nxp Usa, Inc. | Testing a switched mode supply with waveform generator and capture channel |
CN102520779A (en) * | 2011-11-21 | 2012-06-27 | 浪潮电子信息产业股份有限公司 | Method for dynamically regulating memory voltage to enhance system stability |
KR101273354B1 (en) | 2011-12-02 | 2013-06-12 | 동양하이테크산업주식회사 | Apparatus for power supply |
US9071164B2 (en) * | 2011-12-09 | 2015-06-30 | General Electric Company | Multi-phase converter system and method |
US8736469B2 (en) * | 2011-12-16 | 2014-05-27 | Lear Corporation | Method and system for minimizing variation of converter voltage reference |
WO2013096956A1 (en) * | 2011-12-23 | 2013-06-27 | University Of Florida Research Foundation, Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing power |
US8786264B2 (en) | 2012-01-11 | 2014-07-22 | Blackberry Limited | DCDC converter with converter modules that can be dynamically enabled or disabled |
CN104136890B (en) * | 2012-03-02 | 2016-08-24 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Encoder input equipment |
US8954764B2 (en) | 2012-03-05 | 2015-02-10 | Csr Technology Inc. | Method and apparatus for dynamic power management |
GB2502557B8 (en) * | 2012-05-30 | 2015-10-21 | Cirrus Logic Int Semiconductor Ltd | Analogue-to-digital converter |
US8604961B1 (en) * | 2012-08-27 | 2013-12-10 | Infineon Technologies Austria Ag | Ratiometric ADC circuit arrangement |
US9281745B2 (en) | 2012-11-01 | 2016-03-08 | Stellamar Llc | Digital controller for switch-mode DC-DC converters and method |
US9018926B1 (en) * | 2012-11-30 | 2015-04-28 | Rockwell Collins, Inc. | Soft-switched PFC converter |
US20140192565A1 (en) * | 2013-01-08 | 2014-07-10 | System General Corp. | Circuit with synchronous rectifier for controlling programmable power converter |
US9086707B2 (en) * | 2013-01-09 | 2015-07-21 | Nvidia Corporation | System and method for modulating a duty cycle of a switching mode power supply |
US9047270B2 (en) | 2013-01-18 | 2015-06-02 | Freescale Semiconductor Inc. | DMA-assisted irregular sampling sequences |
KR101408600B1 (en) | 2013-01-25 | 2014-06-17 | 삼성전기주식회사 | Switching converter and ac adapter using the same |
US9293997B2 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2016-03-22 | Analog Devices Global | Isolated error amplifier for isolated power supplies |
US9225172B2 (en) * | 2013-06-21 | 2015-12-29 | Hamilton Sundstrand Corporation | Systems and methods for tuning the control of a shunt active power filter over a variable frequency |
CN105518564B (en) * | 2014-02-21 | 2017-12-01 | 联发科技(新加坡)私人有限公司 | CPU over-current protection methods and device |
TWI559111B (en) * | 2014-06-26 | 2016-11-21 | 群聯電子股份有限公司 | Control circuit for switching regulator and method for regulating electrical signal |
CN107431430A (en) * | 2014-10-24 | 2017-12-01 | 德克萨斯仪器股份有限公司 | The soft start controller of converter |
JP6560032B2 (en) * | 2015-06-22 | 2019-08-14 | ローム株式会社 | Semiconductor integrated circuit, audio amplifier circuit, electronic equipment |
WO2017075448A1 (en) * | 2015-10-28 | 2017-05-04 | Analog Devices Global | Power inverter control |
US10289579B2 (en) * | 2015-12-10 | 2019-05-14 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Digital aggregation of interrupts from peripheral devices |
FR3047380B1 (en) * | 2016-01-29 | 2018-05-18 | STMicroelectronics (Alps) SAS | DETECTION OF AN ANALOG CONNECTION IN A VIDEO DECODER |
US10958169B2 (en) | 2016-05-13 | 2021-03-23 | Silanna Asia Pte Ltd | Power converter with robust stable feedback |
US9882473B2 (en) * | 2016-05-13 | 2018-01-30 | Silanna Asia Pte Ltd | Power converter with robust stable feedback |
US9997925B2 (en) * | 2016-07-14 | 2018-06-12 | Getac Technology Corporation | Power supplying method and device thereof |
CN106452016B (en) * | 2016-11-01 | 2018-10-09 | 重庆承亿机电设备有限公司 | The more PID target autocontrol methods of frequency converter |
EP3322092A1 (en) * | 2016-11-14 | 2018-05-16 | Siemens Schweiz AG | Amplifier circuit and method for operating an amplifier circuit |
US10391576B2 (en) * | 2016-11-21 | 2019-08-27 | Illinois Tool Works Inc. | Calculating output inductance of a weld secondary |
US10263635B2 (en) * | 2017-01-11 | 2019-04-16 | Alexei V. Nikitin | Method and apparatus for mitigation of outlier noise |
US10838478B1 (en) * | 2017-06-22 | 2020-11-17 | Bretford Manufacturing, Inc. | Power system |
JP6407366B1 (en) * | 2017-07-04 | 2018-10-17 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Power converter |
US10742229B2 (en) * | 2018-05-07 | 2020-08-11 | Maxlinear, Inc. | Dynamic element matching |
US10432088B1 (en) * | 2018-06-05 | 2019-10-01 | Dialog Semiconductor (Uk) Limited | Two-stage multi-phase switching power supply with cross-domain adaptive voltage and frequency regulation |
US10530352B1 (en) * | 2018-09-27 | 2020-01-07 | Infineon Technologies Austria Ag | Power transition filtering with pulse modulated control |
CN110535361B (en) * | 2019-07-31 | 2020-11-20 | 北京精密机电控制设备研究所 | Constant-power wide-range digital program-controlled power supply and control method |
DE102019212639A1 (en) | 2019-08-23 | 2021-02-25 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Control device, switching converter and method for controlling an output variable |
EP3796532B1 (en) | 2019-09-19 | 2024-03-06 | Nxp B.V. | Soft start method for a single inductor multiple output power supply |
US11561883B2 (en) * | 2019-12-12 | 2023-01-24 | Sandisk Technologies Llc | Pipelined micro controller unit |
TWI738477B (en) * | 2020-08-26 | 2021-09-01 | 致新科技股份有限公司 | Soft-start circuit |
US11588422B2 (en) | 2020-08-26 | 2023-02-21 | Global Mixed-Mode Technology Inc. | Soft-start circuit |
US11823740B2 (en) | 2021-12-08 | 2023-11-21 | International Business Machines Corporation | Selective application of multiple pulse durations to crossbar arrays |
TWI817284B (en) * | 2021-12-10 | 2023-10-01 | 北京歐錸德微電子技術有限公司 | Soft start circuit, DC-DC converter, power supply device and information processing device |
TWI831689B (en) * | 2023-05-04 | 2024-02-01 | 立錡科技股份有限公司 | Switching regulator and control circuit thereof and quick response method |
Citations (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4630187A (en) * | 1985-09-09 | 1986-12-16 | Sperry Corporation | Power converter with duty ratio quantization |
US5353212A (en) * | 1992-04-20 | 1994-10-04 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Zero-voltage switching power converter with ripple current cancellation |
US6294954B1 (en) * | 1999-09-23 | 2001-09-25 | Audiologic, Incorporated | Adaptive dead time control for switching circuits |
US20040095122A1 (en) * | 2002-11-19 | 2004-05-20 | Power-One Limited | System and method for providing digital pulse width modulation |
US20040155637A1 (en) * | 2003-02-10 | 2004-08-12 | Power-One Limited | Digital signal processor architecture optimized for controlling switched mode power supply |
US20040196014A1 (en) * | 2003-02-10 | 2004-10-07 | Power-One Limited | ADC transfer function providing improved dynamic regulation in a switched mode power supply |
US7102898B2 (en) * | 2001-02-01 | 2006-09-05 | Di/Dt, Inc. | Isolated drive circuitry used in switch-mode power converters |
Family Cites Families (120)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4109194A (en) | 1977-06-09 | 1978-08-22 | Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated | Digital feedback control utilizing accumulated reference count to regulate voltage output of switching regulator |
US4266182A (en) | 1979-08-24 | 1981-05-05 | Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated | Common control with frequency drift compensation for a plurality of switching regulators |
US4585997A (en) | 1983-12-08 | 1986-04-29 | Televideo Systems, Inc. | Method and apparatus for blanking noise present in an alternating electrical signal |
JPS60237527A (en) * | 1984-05-11 | 1985-11-26 | Mitsubishi Electric Corp | A-d converting device |
JPS60248702A (en) * | 1984-05-24 | 1985-12-09 | Mitsubishi Rayon Co Ltd | Method and device to control polymerization reaction |
US4626769A (en) | 1985-03-13 | 1986-12-02 | Analog Devices, Inc. | Voltage/current source |
US4725940A (en) | 1987-06-10 | 1988-02-16 | Unisys Corporation | Quantized duty ratio power sharing converters |
JPH01302688A (en) | 1988-05-30 | 1989-12-06 | Toshiba Corp | Cooking apparatus |
US4855888A (en) | 1988-10-19 | 1989-08-08 | Unisys Corporation | Constant frequency resonant power converter with zero voltage switching |
JPH04506744A (en) | 1989-02-06 | 1992-11-19 | ボラル ジョンズ ペリー インダストリーズ ピーティーワイ リミテッド | Power supply method |
US5023542A (en) * | 1989-08-03 | 1991-06-11 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy | Current limiting arrangement in a power converter |
JP2797558B2 (en) * | 1989-11-29 | 1998-09-17 | ソニー株式会社 | Digital audio signal and analog audio signal playback device |
US4967332A (en) | 1990-02-26 | 1990-10-30 | General Electric Company | HVIC primary side power supply controller including full-bridge/half-bridge driver |
JP2610362B2 (en) | 1990-07-27 | 1997-05-14 | 株式会社テック | High voltage power supply controller |
JPH0756512B2 (en) * | 1990-11-22 | 1995-06-14 | 株式会社地球科学総合研究所 | Multi-vibrator waveform monitoring system |
US5082231A (en) * | 1991-01-22 | 1992-01-21 | Knowles John R | Post holder and marker therefor |
KR930004772Y1 (en) * | 1991-05-13 | 1993-07-23 | 금성일렉트론 주식회사 | Analog / Digital Converter Test Equipment |
US5200692A (en) | 1991-09-23 | 1993-04-06 | The Boeing Company | Apparatus for limiting current through a plurality of parallel transistors |
JP2885256B2 (en) | 1991-12-25 | 1999-04-19 | 日本電気株式会社 | Microcomputer |
US5481730A (en) | 1992-01-24 | 1996-01-02 | Compaq Computer Corp. | Monitoring and control of power supply functions using a microcontroller |
US5428522A (en) | 1992-08-17 | 1995-06-27 | Kaman Electromagnetics Corporation | Four quadrant unipolar pulse width modulated inverter |
US5461301A (en) | 1993-01-19 | 1995-10-24 | Qualidyne Systems | Dual slope soft start for pulse width modulator controllers used in power converters |
US5298872A (en) | 1993-02-16 | 1994-03-29 | David Trump | Low profile heater and support assembly for YIG spheres |
JP3191275B2 (en) | 1993-02-22 | 2001-07-23 | 横河電機株式会社 | Switching power supply |
US6121760A (en) | 1994-03-17 | 2000-09-19 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | Turn-on controller for switch-mode regulator |
US5594631A (en) | 1994-04-20 | 1997-01-14 | The Boeing Company | Digital pulse width modulator for power supply control |
US5627758A (en) | 1994-06-10 | 1997-05-06 | Northrop Grumman Corporation | Vector control board for an electric vehicle propulsion system motor controller |
US5706007A (en) * | 1995-01-03 | 1998-01-06 | Smar Research Corporation | Analog current / digital bus protocol converter circuit |
US5748428A (en) | 1995-07-28 | 1998-05-05 | United Technologies Automotive, Inc. | Pulse width modulation and protection circuit |
US5751150A (en) | 1995-08-11 | 1998-05-12 | Aerovironment | Bidirectional load and source cycler |
JPH09103068A (en) | 1995-10-05 | 1997-04-15 | Hitachi Ltd | Power supply |
US5729721A (en) | 1995-11-13 | 1998-03-17 | Motorola, Inc. | Timebase synchronization in separate integrated circuits or separate modules |
KR0179872B1 (en) | 1996-03-26 | 1999-05-15 | 이종수 | Dead time compensation method of motor drive inverter |
US5847942A (en) | 1996-05-30 | 1998-12-08 | Unitrode Corporation | Controller for isolated boost converter with improved detection of RMS input voltage for distortion reduction and having load-dependent overlap conduction delay of shunt MOSFET |
EP0901215A4 (en) | 1996-06-24 | 2000-01-05 | Tdk Corp | Switching power unit |
JP3384522B2 (en) | 1996-07-30 | 2003-03-10 | 矢崎総業株式会社 | Switching device |
JP3678891B2 (en) | 1997-08-07 | 2005-08-03 | 松下電器産業株式会社 | Output circuit for PWM inverter |
JP3763957B2 (en) | 1998-01-27 | 2006-04-05 | 富士通株式会社 | PLL device |
JP3702091B2 (en) | 1998-03-31 | 2005-10-05 | 富士通株式会社 | Power supply device and method for controlling power supply circuit |
JP3744680B2 (en) | 1998-03-31 | 2006-02-15 | 富士通株式会社 | Power supply device and method for controlling power supply circuit |
US6281606B1 (en) | 1998-04-07 | 2001-08-28 | Mike's Train House | Plural output electric train control station |
US6144245A (en) | 1998-06-29 | 2000-11-07 | Unitrode Corporation | Adaptive leading edge blanking circuit to eliminate spike on power switching transistor current sense signal |
JP3039781B1 (en) | 1998-11-04 | 2000-05-08 | 日本電気株式会社 | Timer circuit |
US6317458B1 (en) | 1998-12-21 | 2001-11-13 | Caterpillar Inc. | Fault detection for a pulse width modulation driver |
US6487246B1 (en) | 1999-04-08 | 2002-11-26 | National Semiconductor Corporation | Method and apparatus for programmable pulse width modulated signal generation with period and duty cycle values updated with controlled relative timing |
US6917186B2 (en) | 2000-04-24 | 2005-07-12 | S & C Electric Co. | Monitoring and control for power electronic system |
KR100325407B1 (en) | 1999-07-09 | 2002-03-04 | 이종수 | Pulse width modulation control system |
DE19936329B4 (en) * | 1999-08-02 | 2008-03-27 | Infineon Technologies Ag | Method for A / D conversion of analog signals and corresponding A / D converter arrangement |
US6600641B2 (en) | 1999-10-22 | 2003-07-29 | Motorola, Inc. | Overcurrent protection for the series fuse |
US6465993B1 (en) | 1999-11-01 | 2002-10-15 | John Clarkin | Voltage regulation employing a composite feedback signal |
US6337544B1 (en) | 1999-12-14 | 2002-01-08 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | Digital lamp signal processor |
US6257205B1 (en) | 1999-12-22 | 2001-07-10 | Ford Global Technologies, Inc. | System for controlling a fuel injector |
JP2001243715A (en) | 2000-02-24 | 2001-09-07 | Sony Corp | Waveform shaping circuit |
JP2001258269A (en) | 2000-03-15 | 2001-09-21 | Kawasaki Steel Corp | Soft switching dc-dc converter |
US6169679B1 (en) | 2000-03-21 | 2001-01-02 | Ford Motor Company | Method and system for synchronizing the phase angles of parallel connected inverters |
US6268820B1 (en) * | 2000-05-05 | 2001-07-31 | Analog Devices, Inc. | Analog-to-digital conversion system |
US6316926B1 (en) | 2000-05-19 | 2001-11-13 | Stmicroelectronics S.R.L. | Switching control circuit |
US6329802B1 (en) | 2000-05-23 | 2001-12-11 | Honeywell International Inc. | Method and apparatus for programmable power curve and wave generator |
US6894911B2 (en) | 2000-06-02 | 2005-05-17 | Iwatt, Inc. | Method of driving a power converter by using a power pulse and a sense pulse |
US20020057080A1 (en) | 2000-06-02 | 2002-05-16 | Iwatt | Optimized digital regulation of switching power supply |
US6249111B1 (en) | 2000-06-22 | 2001-06-19 | Intel Corporation | Dual drive buck regulator |
DE10038372C2 (en) | 2000-08-07 | 2003-03-13 | Infineon Technologies Ag | Differential digital / analog converter |
US6559783B1 (en) * | 2000-08-16 | 2003-05-06 | Microchip Technology Incorporated | Programmable auto-converting analog to digital conversion module |
AU2002211583A1 (en) | 2000-10-10 | 2002-04-22 | Primarion, Inc. | System and method for highly phased power regulation |
US7007176B2 (en) | 2000-10-10 | 2006-02-28 | Primarion, Inc. | System and method for highly phased power regulation using adaptive compensation control |
EP1199789A1 (en) | 2000-10-19 | 2002-04-24 | Semiconductor Components Industries, LLC | Circuit and method of operating a low-noise, on-demand regulator in switched or linear mode |
US6654264B2 (en) | 2000-12-13 | 2003-11-25 | Intel Corporation | System for providing a regulated voltage with high current capability and low quiescent current |
US6686831B2 (en) | 2001-01-23 | 2004-02-03 | Invensys Systems, Inc. | Variable power control for process control instruments |
US6965502B2 (en) | 2001-03-21 | 2005-11-15 | Primarion, Inc. | System, device and method for providing voltage regulation to a microelectronic device |
US6504321B2 (en) | 2001-02-06 | 2003-01-07 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Universal hardware/software feedback control for high-frequency signals |
US6356463B1 (en) * | 2001-02-07 | 2002-03-12 | Phoenixtec Power Co. Ltd. | High frequency, voltage feedback control mode power converter |
US6400127B1 (en) | 2001-02-12 | 2002-06-04 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | Dual mode pulse-width modulator for power control applications |
US6788035B2 (en) | 2001-06-12 | 2004-09-07 | Primarion, Inc. | Serial bus control method and apparatus for a microelectronic power regulation system |
US6515880B1 (en) | 2001-10-19 | 2003-02-04 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | Soft-start control for DC/DC switching regulators |
JP3798292B2 (en) | 2001-10-31 | 2006-07-19 | 富士通株式会社 | Data synchronization circuit and communication interface circuit |
US6900995B2 (en) * | 2001-11-29 | 2005-05-31 | Iwatt, Inc. | PWM power converter controlled by transistion detection of a comparator error signal |
US6714424B2 (en) | 2001-11-30 | 2004-03-30 | Ballard Power Systems Corporation | Dead-time compensation with narrow pulse elimination in solid- state switch devices |
CN1228908C (en) | 2001-12-31 | 2005-11-23 | 艾默生网络能源有限公司 | Switch synchronization method of parallel converter system. |
JP3775661B2 (en) | 2002-01-21 | 2006-05-17 | 矢崎総業株式会社 | Power distribution system |
US6870720B2 (en) | 2002-01-25 | 2005-03-22 | Pacific Engineering Corp. | Device and method for determining intermittent short circuit |
US6975098B2 (en) | 2002-01-31 | 2005-12-13 | Vlt, Inc. | Factorized power architecture with point of load sine amplitude converters |
US6933710B2 (en) | 2002-02-19 | 2005-08-23 | Fairchild Semiconductor Corporation | Soft start techniques for control loops that regulate DC/DC converters |
US6690589B2 (en) | 2002-02-28 | 2004-02-10 | Valere Power, Inc. | Interleaved converter power factor correction method and apparatus |
US6775164B2 (en) * | 2002-03-14 | 2004-08-10 | Tyco Electronics Corporation | Three-terminal, low voltage pulse width modulation controller IC |
US6593864B1 (en) | 2002-04-15 | 2003-07-15 | Optical Solutions, Inc. | Digital-to-analog converter with temperature compensation |
US6977492B2 (en) | 2002-07-10 | 2005-12-20 | Marvell World Trade Ltd. | Output regulator |
ITMI20021539A1 (en) | 2002-07-12 | 2004-01-12 | St Microelectronics Srl | DIGITAL CONTROLLER FOR SWITCHING DC-DC CONVERTERS |
US6801027B2 (en) | 2002-09-26 | 2004-10-05 | Itt Manufacturing Enterprises, Inc. | Power conversion in variable load applications |
EP1406372A1 (en) | 2002-10-01 | 2004-04-07 | STMicroelectronics S.r.l. | Digital control apparatus for a switching DC-DC converter |
KR20050048692A (en) | 2002-10-21 | 2005-05-24 | 어드밴스드 파워 테크놀로지 인코포레이티드 | Ac-dc power converter having high input power factor and low harmonic distortion |
US6961015B2 (en) | 2002-11-14 | 2005-11-01 | Fyre Storm, Inc. | Touch screen display circuit and voltage measurement circuit |
EP1422813A3 (en) | 2002-11-19 | 2005-04-13 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | Inverter control method and apparatus |
US7023268B1 (en) | 2003-03-21 | 2006-04-04 | D2Audio Corporation | Systems and methods for automatically adjusting channel timing |
JP2004364488A (en) | 2003-05-12 | 2004-12-24 | Taiyo Yuden Co Ltd | Switching power supply circuit and overcurrent protection method therefor |
US6819577B1 (en) | 2003-05-19 | 2004-11-16 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | Distributing clock and programming phase shift in multiphase parallelable converters |
US7075276B2 (en) | 2003-07-03 | 2006-07-11 | Isine, Inc. | On-chip compensation control for voltage regulation |
US7200173B2 (en) | 2003-10-27 | 2007-04-03 | Tushar Prakash Ringe | Method and apparatus for generating a distortionless pulse width modulated waveform |
US7057907B2 (en) * | 2003-11-21 | 2006-06-06 | Fairchild Semiconductor Corporation | Power converter having improved control |
US7042201B2 (en) | 2003-12-19 | 2006-05-09 | Silicon Labs Cp, Inc. | Digital control circuit for switching power supply with pattern generator |
KR100616538B1 (en) | 2004-01-05 | 2006-08-29 | 삼성전기주식회사 | Single stage backlight inverter and its driving method |
US7038438B2 (en) | 2004-01-29 | 2006-05-02 | Enpirion, Inc. | Controller for a power converter and a method of controlling a switch thereof |
US7148669B2 (en) | 2004-02-02 | 2006-12-12 | The Regents Of The University Of Colorado, A Body Corporate | Predictive digital current controllers for switching power converters |
US7006364B2 (en) | 2004-03-15 | 2006-02-28 | Delta Electronics, Inc. | Driving circuit for DC/DC converter |
US7088600B2 (en) | 2004-03-16 | 2006-08-08 | Intersil Americas, Inc. | Startup via FB pin regulation |
US7154248B2 (en) | 2004-07-15 | 2006-12-26 | Teleflex Canada Inc. | Control system for an electric machine |
US7142140B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2006-11-28 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Auto scanning ADC for DPWM |
US7417877B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2008-08-26 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Digital power supply with programmable soft start |
US7502240B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2009-03-10 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Distributed power supply system with separate SYNC control for controlling remote digital DC/DC converters |
US7426123B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2008-09-16 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Finite state machine digital pulse width modulator for a digitally controlled power supply |
US7319312B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2008-01-15 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Digital power supply controller with voltage positioning |
US7428159B2 (en) | 2005-03-31 | 2008-09-23 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Digital PWM controller |
US7245512B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2007-07-17 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | PID based controller for DC—DC converter with post-processing filters |
US20060083037A1 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2006-04-20 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Digital PWM controller with efficiency optimization as a function of PWM duty cycle |
US6992469B1 (en) | 2004-12-08 | 2006-01-31 | Kiawe Forest, Llc | Digital voltage regulator for DC/DC converters |
JP2006191741A (en) | 2005-01-06 | 2006-07-20 | Sanken Electric Co Ltd | Dc converter |
US7301488B2 (en) | 2005-03-31 | 2007-11-27 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Digital PWM controller for preventing limit cycle oscillations |
US7518894B2 (en) | 2005-03-31 | 2009-04-14 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Distributed power supply system having reassignable master |
US7446430B2 (en) | 2005-03-31 | 2008-11-04 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Plural load distributed power supply system with shared master for controlling remote digital DC/DC converters |
US7456621B2 (en) | 2005-05-06 | 2008-11-25 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Digital controller based power factor correction circuit |
US8059436B2 (en) * | 2006-12-07 | 2011-11-15 | Northern Power Systems, Inc. | Modular power converters usable alone or in a multiphase power converter |
-
2005
- 2005-06-29 US US11/170,541 patent/US7142140B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2005-06-30 US US11/172,738 patent/US7426645B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2005-06-30 US US11/172,351 patent/US20060023781A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2005-06-30 US US11/172,482 patent/US7640455B2/en active Active
- 2005-06-30 US US11/172,344 patent/US7498787B2/en active Active
- 2005-07-27 WO PCT/US2005/026586 patent/WO2006015015A2/en active Application Filing
- 2005-09-27 US US11/236,098 patent/US7315160B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2008
- 2008-09-16 US US12/211,631 patent/US7855905B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
Patent Citations (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4630187A (en) * | 1985-09-09 | 1986-12-16 | Sperry Corporation | Power converter with duty ratio quantization |
US5353212A (en) * | 1992-04-20 | 1994-10-04 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Zero-voltage switching power converter with ripple current cancellation |
US6294954B1 (en) * | 1999-09-23 | 2001-09-25 | Audiologic, Incorporated | Adaptive dead time control for switching circuits |
US7102898B2 (en) * | 2001-02-01 | 2006-09-05 | Di/Dt, Inc. | Isolated drive circuitry used in switch-mode power converters |
US20040095122A1 (en) * | 2002-11-19 | 2004-05-20 | Power-One Limited | System and method for providing digital pulse width modulation |
US20040155637A1 (en) * | 2003-02-10 | 2004-08-12 | Power-One Limited | Digital signal processor architecture optimized for controlling switched mode power supply |
US20040196014A1 (en) * | 2003-02-10 | 2004-10-07 | Power-One Limited | ADC transfer function providing improved dynamic regulation in a switched mode power supply |
Cited By (26)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20050281058A1 (en) * | 2004-06-21 | 2005-12-22 | Issa Batarseh | Dynamic optimization of efficiency using dead time and FET drive control |
US7426123B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2008-09-16 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Finite state machine digital pulse width modulator for a digitally controlled power supply |
US20060023479A1 (en) * | 2004-07-27 | 2006-02-02 | Leung Ka Y | PID based controller for DC-DC converter with post-processing filters |
US7855905B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2010-12-21 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Digital power supply controller with integrated microcontroller |
US7640455B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2009-12-29 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Digital PWM controller with programmable safe state in presence of fault |
US7426645B2 (en) | 2004-07-27 | 2008-09-16 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Digital power supply controller with integrated microcontroller |
US7245512B2 (en) * | 2004-07-27 | 2007-07-17 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | PID based controller for DC—DC converter with post-processing filters |
US7428159B2 (en) | 2005-03-31 | 2008-09-23 | Silicon Laboratories Inc. | Digital PWM controller |
US8638242B2 (en) | 2006-02-03 | 2014-01-28 | Maxim Integrated Products, Inc. | Digital power management using serial data transfer |
US20090016424A1 (en) * | 2006-02-03 | 2009-01-15 | L&L Engineering Llc | Systems and methods for digital control utilizing oversampling |
US7466254B2 (en) | 2006-02-03 | 2008-12-16 | L&L Engineering Llc | Systems and methods for digital control utilizing oversampling |
US8059018B2 (en) | 2006-02-03 | 2011-11-15 | L&L Engineering, Llc | Systems and methods for digital control utilizing oversampling |
US20070182610A1 (en) * | 2006-02-03 | 2007-08-09 | L&L Engineering, Llc | Systems and methods for digital control |
US20100064124A1 (en) * | 2006-11-16 | 2010-03-11 | Karl Rinne | Digital power controller |
WO2008140734A1 (en) * | 2007-05-08 | 2008-11-20 | International Rectifier Corporation | Digital pwm modulator with fast dynamic response and fine resolution |
US20090015231A1 (en) * | 2007-05-08 | 2009-01-15 | Wenkai Wu | Digital pwm modulator with fast dynamic response and fine resolution |
US7944193B2 (en) | 2007-05-08 | 2011-05-17 | International Rectifier Corporation | Digital PWM modulator with fast dynamic response and fine resolution |
US7633815B2 (en) * | 2007-12-05 | 2009-12-15 | Spansion Llc | Flexible word line boosting across VCC supply |
US20090147585A1 (en) * | 2007-12-05 | 2009-06-11 | Spansion Llc | Flexible word line boosting across vcc supply |
US20130093515A1 (en) * | 2010-12-15 | 2013-04-18 | Liang Cheng | Pwm comparator and class d amplifier |
US8836419B2 (en) * | 2010-12-15 | 2014-09-16 | Csmc Technologies Fab1 Co., Ltd. | PWM comparator and class D amplifier |
CN103094117A (en) * | 2011-11-01 | 2013-05-08 | 上海华虹Nec电子有限公司 | Technique method of manufacturing bottom thick grate oxide layer groove metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) |
US20160164701A1 (en) * | 2014-12-04 | 2016-06-09 | Stmicroelectronics (Rousset) Sas | Transmission and Reception Methods for a Binary Signal on a Serial Link |
US10122552B2 (en) * | 2014-12-04 | 2018-11-06 | Stmicroelectronics (Rousset) Sas | Transmission and reception methods for a binary signal on a serial link |
US10361890B2 (en) * | 2014-12-04 | 2019-07-23 | Stmicroelectronics (Rousset) Sas | Transmission and reception methods for a binary signal on a serial link |
US10616006B2 (en) * | 2014-12-04 | 2020-04-07 | Stmicroelectronics (Rousset) Sas | Transmission and reception methods for a binary signal on a serial link |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US20060022860A1 (en) | 2006-02-02 |
US7855905B2 (en) | 2010-12-21 |
WO2006015015A2 (en) | 2006-02-09 |
US20060022851A1 (en) | 2006-02-02 |
US20060022852A1 (en) | 2006-02-02 |
WO2006015015A3 (en) | 2006-06-15 |
US20060022656A1 (en) | 2006-02-02 |
US7426645B2 (en) | 2008-09-16 |
US7315160B2 (en) | 2008-01-01 |
US20090013199A1 (en) | 2009-01-08 |
US7640455B2 (en) | 2009-12-29 |
US7142140B2 (en) | 2006-11-28 |
US7498787B2 (en) | 2009-03-03 |
US20060023476A1 (en) | 2006-02-02 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US7498787B2 (en) | Digital PWM controller for digital power supply having programmable dead times | |
US7426123B2 (en) | Finite state machine digital pulse width modulator for a digitally controlled power supply | |
US7428159B2 (en) | Digital PWM controller | |
US7502240B2 (en) | Distributed power supply system with separate SYNC control for controlling remote digital DC/DC converters | |
US7319312B2 (en) | Digital power supply controller with voltage positioning | |
US20060083037A1 (en) | Digital PWM controller with efficiency optimization as a function of PWM duty cycle | |
US7446430B2 (en) | Plural load distributed power supply system with shared master for controlling remote digital DC/DC converters | |
US7518894B2 (en) | Distributed power supply system having reassignable master | |
US7417877B2 (en) | Digital power supply with programmable soft start | |
US7245512B2 (en) | PID based controller for DC—DC converter with post-processing filters | |
US20060172783A1 (en) | Digital DC/DC converter with SYNC control | |
US7518350B2 (en) | MCU/driver point of load digital controller with optimized voltage | |
US7007176B2 (en) | System and method for highly phased power regulation using adaptive compensation control | |
US7902803B2 (en) | Digital current mode controller | |
US6204651B1 (en) | Method and apparatus for regulating an output voltage of a switch mode converter | |
US7391196B2 (en) | In system analysis and compensation for a digital PWM controller | |
US8552702B2 (en) | Digital control switching regulator having an input voltage detection circuit | |
CN119448759A (en) | Device for converting a first voltage into a second voltage | |
EP1325547A2 (en) | System and method for highly phased power regulation using adaptive compensation control | |
Zhang et al. | Current sharing in digitally controlled masterless multi-phase DC-DC converters | |
CN110311559B (en) | Adaptive control for reconfiguring power converters |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: SILICON LABORATORIES INC., TEXAS Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:LEUNG, KA Y.;LEUNG, KAFAI;REEL/FRAME:016753/0290 Effective date: 20050629 |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |